yoga of the inner world

8/12/2019 Yoga of the Inner World

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/yoga-of-the-inner-world 1/235

1



Michael Raduga

IUltimate Yoga.

Yoga of the Inner World.

First Edition

www.obe4u.com

Translated by

Peter Orange

The practice of phase states of the mind (ultimate yoga) is the

hottest and most promising pursuit of the modern age. nli!e in the

past" the notions of #lucid dreaming$" #out%of%body e&perience$ and

#astral pro'ection$ hae already lost their mystical halo" and their real basis has been studied in minute detail from the most non%nonsense

approach. o*" this phenomenon is accessible to eeryone"

regardless of their *orldie*. +t is no* !no*n ho* to easily master

it and apply it effectiely. This te&tboo! gies each and eery personsomething that preiously could only be dreamt about % a parallel

reality and the possibility of e&isting in t*o *orlds. This boo! is for pragmatic people *ho are not used to ta!ing anything on faith or

reading about empty theories. The boo! only deals *ith *hat *or!s

in practice" and nothing else.

Proposals regarding translating and publishing this boo! and other

*or!s of M. Raduga may be sent to aing,aing.ru

-

http://www.obe4u.com/




Table of ontents/

Part I

Entering the Out-of-Body State

Chapter 1 – eneral Ba!"ground

The Essence of the Phase Phenomenon0hy Enter the Phase

The 2ifestyle of a Practitioner

3lgorithm for Mastering the Phase

Types of Techni4ues

ontraindicationsRecommendations for sing the 5uideboo! E&ercises for hapter 1

Chapter # – Indire!t $e!hni%ue&

The oncept of +ndirect Techni4ues

Primary +ndirect Techni4ues

6econdary +ndirect Techni4ues

6electing the Right Techni4ues6eparation Techni4ues

The 7est Time to Practice

onscious 3*a!ening

3*a!ening *ithout Moing

ycles of +ndirect Techni4ues8ints from the Mind

3ggression and Passiity

6trategy for 3ction

Typical Mista!es *ith +ndirect Techni4ues

E&ercises for hapter -

Chapter ' – (ire!t $e!hni%ue&

The oncept of 9irect Techni4ues

The 7est Time to Practice

+ntensity of 3ttempts7ody Position

:



9uration of an 3ttemptRela&ation

;ariations of sing 9irect Techni4ues

The Free%floating 6tate of Mind

3u&iliary Factors6trategy for 3ction

Typical Mista!es *ith 9irect Techni4uesE&ercises for hapter :

Chapter ) – Be!oming Con&!iou& While (reaming

The oncept of Techni4ues +noling 7ecoming onscious

*hile 9reamingTechni4ues for 7ecoming onscious in a 9ream3ctions to be 9one *hen 7ecoming onscious *hile

9reaming

6trategy for 3ction

Typical Mista!es *hen Practicing 7ecoming onscious

*hile 9reaming

E&ercises for hapter <

Chapter * – +on-autonomou& ,ethod&

The Essence of on%autonomous Methods for Entering the

Phase

ueing Technologies

0or!ing in PairsTechnologies for +nducing the Phase

8ypnosis and 6uggestion

Physiological 6ignals

hemical 6ubstances

The Future of on%autonomous Methods for Entering the

PhaseTypical Mista!es *ith on%autonomous Techni4ues

E&ercises for hapter =

Part II,anaging the Out-of-Body Eperien!e

<



Chapter – (eepening

The oncept of 9eepening

Primary 9eepening Techni4ues

9eepening through 6ensory 3mplification6econdary 9eepening Techni4ues

5eneral 3ctiityTypical Mista!es 9uring 9eepening

E&ercises for hapter >

Chapter / – ,aintaining

The 5eneral oncept of MaintainingTechni4ues and Rules against Returning to the 7odyTechni4ues and Rules for Resisting Falling 3sleep

Techni4ues against an nrecogni?ed Phase

5eneral Rules for Maintaining

Typical Mista!es *ith Maintaining

E&ercises for hapter @

Chapter 0 – Primary S"ill&The Essence of Primary 6!ills

9iscerning the Phase

Emergency Return. Paralysis

Fighting Fear

reation of ;isionontact *ith 2iing Ob'ects

Reading

;ibrations

Techni4ues for Translocating through Ob'ects

Flight

6uper%abilitiesThe +mportance of onfidence

ontrolling Pain

Moral 6tandards in the Phase

6tudying Possibilities and 6ensationsTypical Mista!es *ith Primary 6!ills

=



Chapter 1' – Putting a 2a!e on the Phenomenon

6tephen 2aberge

arlos astaneda

Robert 3. Monroe

Patricia 5arfield6ylan Muldoon

harles 2eadbeater Robert 7ruce

Richard 0ebster

harles Tart

Chapter 1) – 2inal $e&t

6ppendi

3ssessment of Practitioners E&periences (chapter 1-)

3ns*ers to the Final Test (chapter 1<)

3 6implified 9escription of the Easiest Method for Entering

the Phase using +ndirect Techni4ues

Ta!e Part in ResearchThe ell Phone Techni4ue

3ttentionH

The 6chool of Out%of%7ody Trael

7rief 5lossary of Terms and 9efinitions

@



2ore8ord

This guideboo! is the result of ten years of e&tremely actie personal practice and study of the out%of%body phenomenon(the

phase)" coupled *ith haing successfully taught it to thousands of people. + !no* all of the obstacles and problems that are usually run

into *hen getting to !no* this phenomenon" and hae tried to protect

future practitioners from them in this boo!.

This guideboo! *as not created for those *ho prefer light" empty

reading. +t is for those *ho *ould li!e to learn something. +t containsno speculations or stories" only dry" hard facts and techni4ues incombination *ith a completely pragmatic approach and clear

procedures for action. They hae all been successfully erified by a

ast number of practitioners that often had no prior e&perience. +n

order to achiee the same result" it is only necessary to read through

each section thoroughly and complete the assignments.

The boo! is beneficial not only for beginners" but also for those *ho

already !no* *hat it feels li!e to hae an out%of%body encounter andhae a certain amount of e&perience" as this guideboo! is deoted not

only to entering the state" but also e4ually dedicated to controlling it.

ontrary to popular opinion" there is nothing difficult about this

phenomenon if one tries to attain it *ith regular and right effort. On

aerage" results are reached in less than a *ee! if attempts are madeeery day. More often than not" the techni4ues *or! in literally a

couple of attempts.

Michael Raduga

Founder of the School of Out-of-Body Travel

January 11, 2!

A



Part 1

Entering the Pha&e State

Chapter 1 – eneral Ba!"ground

$9E ESSE+CE O2 $9E P96SE P9E+O,E+O+

The term phase state (or simply phase) encompasses a number of

*idely !no*n dissociatie phenomena" many of *hich are referred to

by arious terms" such as astral or out-of-"ody e#perience. This

concept also includes the more pragmatic term lucid drea$ing " butdoes not al*ays e&ist in the sense and form implied by that

e&pression. 8ence" the term phase has been introduced to ease the

study of phenomena that e&ist beyond habitual I and often unfair %

associations and stereotypes. The term out-of-"ody e#perience isaccurate to the e&tent that it describes the sensation felt by a person

e&periencing the phase phenomenon. % phase has t&o pri$ary attri"utes' 1() practitioners possess full,

conscious a&areness during the e#perience, and 2() practitioners

recogni*e a genuine separation fro$ the physical "ody(

6imultaneously" the degree to *hich practitioners perceie the

phase enironment affects the leel of sensory e&periences therein"

*hich often occur in a higher form than the sensory e&periences of*a!efulness. This concept is difficult to imagine *ithout firsthand

e&perience of the phase. 3nd so" it is not *ithout reason that this

practice is considered to be a higher state of self%hypnosis or

meditation" and is often referred to under different names as the

highest possible human achieement in arious religious and

mystical moements (yoga" 7uddhism" etc.).

B



+n essence" the phase is an une&plored state of mind *here one is

unable to control and feel his physical body. +nstead" his space

perception is filled *ith realistic phantom e&periences.

Interesting Fact!

Sensations in the phase state can "e so realisticthat practitioners &ho unintentionally enter phase

often "elieve they are still in the physical "ody, that

the e#perience is occurring in the &a+ing state(

These types of unintended e#cursions $ost often

occur at night or early in the $orning(

+t is belieed that up to one 4uarter of the human population has

encountered this phenomenon. 8o*eer" if ariations and differentdegrees of intensity of the state are ta!en into consideration" it may

be safely assumed that eeryone has encountered the phase. 6ince the

phase is a rare sub'ect of study" many *ho inadertently enter it donot reali?e *hat has ta!en place once they return to *a!efulness.

Many do not assign any significance to the occurrence of a phase

enironment that is not fully formed because shallo* phases dont

leae the same 'olting impression as deep states. Elusie as the phase

may seem" this is an e&tremely common phenomenon" accessible to

1C



anyone *illing to consciously learn and apply the correct methods ofachieing and maintaining the phase.

W9Y E+$E: $9E P96SE;

6uch a 4uestion can only arise from not fully understanding the

properties of the phenomenon and its nature. 0hen one suddenlyunderstands at a certain moment that he is 'ust as real as he normally

is" and is standing some*here that is not in the physical *orld *ith

his same hands and body" and can touch eerything around him and

discern fine details" such much emotion stirs up inside him that no

4uestions arise at all. This is the $ost a$a*ing e#perience that a person can attain The initial phase encounter is al*ays 'olting and sometimes

frightening. 9epending on the indiidual" fear e&perienced during

initial encounters *ith the phase occurs in about one%third of all

cases. Een eteran practitioners encounter fear" *hich spea!s to the

profound nature of the phase state.

0ith time" as rapture ebbs and emotions *ane" thoughts turn from

the fact of the phenomenon itself to*ards ho* to someho* use it.3nd here" a fantastically dierse field of practical application opens

up before the practitioner. These applications I *hich this boo!

communicates I are not to be associated *ith the many unproen and

dubious methods often described in sundry esoteric literature. The

information presented herein is erifiable" practical" and attainable. 0hateer the nature of the phase % a state of mind" or perhaps an

e&ternal e&perience % this is the sole opportunity to/ isit any part of

the *orld or unierseJ see people *ho are out%of%reach in real life"

including relaties" the deceased" celebrities" and arious creaturesJ

communicate *ith the enormous resources of the subconscious mind

and obtain information from itJ reali?e desires that are unattainable inreal lifeJ model artistic productionsJ influence physiology" and more.

These are not dull e&periences. They are eminently personal and real.

$9E <I2ES$Y<E O2 6 P:6C$I$IO+E:

11



+t must be said that arious diets" e&ercises" rituals" and so forthdo not produce noticeable supplementary effects to proper practice of

the phase. aturally e&istent psychological and physiological comfort

is of the utmost importance. Thus" methods recommending

oereating" under%eating" or tormenting oneself *ith arious diets andstrange e&ercises are useless and ultimately detrimental to a

practitioners *ellness and balance" inariably producing a negatieimpact to the effectieness of techni4ues taught in this guideboo!.

3dditionally" no meaningful association has been found bet*een

practice of the phase and *hat may be construed as #bad habits$.

Regardless of a lifestyles null effect on phase achieement" a

healthy" actie lifestyle *ill al*ays be recommended to en'oy a good4uality of liing.

Interesting Fact!

f one "elieves that it is necessary to position

one.s "ed &ith the head"oard facing the /orth&est

or so$e other direction in order to have $ore

effective out-of-"ody e#periences, then doing so &ill

invaria"ly have a positive effect on results( 0o&ever, the issue at hand is not the positioning of

the "ody, "ut a "elief that is a+in to an intention,

&hich in turn is enor$ously i$portant(

+t has been obsered that a regular and orderly lifestyle increasesthe fre4uency of genuine" lasting phase e&periences. 6leeping

normally and soundly is the most basic e&ample of a lifestyle choice

that produces direct" positie impact on results" especially *hen a

practitioner commits to a full nightGs rest seeral times a *ee!.

6<O:I$9, 2O: ,6S$E:I+ $9E P96SE

3 noice practitioner must understand the procedure for learning

and mastering phase entry. This procedure consists of seeral

primary steps" each of *hich is a uni4ue science unto itself.

1-



1. The first and most important step addresses the techni4uesused to enter the phase state. +t is not necessary to master eery

type of entrance techni4ue (direct" indirect" dream consciousness).

2earning and applying the easiest techni4ues proides the

necessary prere4uisites to more adanced methods. +f so desired"it is possible to try more difficult entrance techni4ues in parallel

*ith the moing on to the subse4uent steps for mastering the phase.

-. ontrary to popular opinion" the need for conscious

techni4ues does not cease upon phase entrance. +t is absolutely

necessary to learn and apply methods for deepening the phase to

achiee a consistently hyper%realistic enironment. Failing toapply deepening techni4ues almost guarantees that e&periences*ill be dull" uninteresting" and subse4uent practice short%lied.

Practitioners should immediately learn and apply deepening

techni4ues after mastering any one entrance method.

:. The third step inoles mastering techni4ues for maintaining

the phase" as *ithout them the aerage person *ould hae phase

e&periences of much shorter duration than is possible. 0hen in

the phase" the 4uestion of ho* to leae it almost neer occurs. Onthe contrary" one is normally thrust from it in the course of

seeral seconds if one simply does nothing.

<. 3fter learning all the necessary techni4ues for mastering the

phase state" it is time to learn and apply methods of control"

*hich encompass the ability to translocate" find and interact *ithob'ects" influence surroundings" and so forth.

=. Once the preiously noted steps hae been accomplished" a

practitioner may proceed to apply phase e&periences to enhance

eeryday life. Oer the course of this guideboo!" *e *ill e&amine

do?ens of these aluable applications in great detail.

1:



"elief in the pheno$enon( t ust happens,

and a large "ody of evidence has "een gathered to support this fact( ven $ore

interesting is that spontaneous e#periences

often occur after a "rief study of $ateriala"out the topic, li+e this guide"oo+(((

3irect techni4ues are perfor$ed &ithout any noticea"le lapse inconsciousness( 5hile practicing direct techni4ues, a lapse into sleep

for less than 6 $inutes is not considered a "reach of the techni4ue(

7y definition" direct techni4ues encompass the performance of

specific actions for a pre%defined interal of time. 6uccessfullyapplied" direct methods result in a phase entrance *ithout passingthrough any intermediary states. For BCK of the population" these

techni4ues are the most difficult because the mind naturally e&ists in

an e&cessiely actie state. +t has been clearly proen *ithin the

6chools student body that noice practitioners do not benefit from

beginning a training regimen *ith direct techni4ues. This is because

direct techni4ues re4uire a thorough understanding and masterful

application of indirect techni4ues in order to be effectie. Theincorrect notion that the phase state is e&tremely difficult to enter is

due to the fact that people are more often dra*n to the more difficult

direct techni4ues. +t is al*ays better to approach direct techni4ues

only after becoming e&pert in the use of indirect techni4ues.

ndirect techni4ues are techni4ues that are put into practice upona&a+ening fro$ sleep(

The effectieness of indirect techni4ues is not dependent on the

length of the prere4uisite sleep cycle. +ndirect techni4ues can be used

*hile e&iting a full nights sleep" after a daytime catnap" or follo*ing

seeral hours of deep sleep. The most important thing is that there isa lapse of consciousness into sleep before implementing the

techni4ues.

+ndirect techni4ues are the easiest techni4ues to practice" *hich is

*hy many practitioners use them to enter the phase. 6leep naturally proides the mind *ith deep rela&ation" *hich is often difficult to

1=



ac4uire by other methods. 6ince sleep is re4uired to perform indirecttechni4ues" it is a conenient" oft%occurring means to conduct

e&periments *ith the phase. oice practitioners benefit greatly from

the use of indirect techni4ues" and learn firsthand the possibility of

phase entrance.

3rea$ consciousness is ac4uired "y techni4ues that allo&

entrance to the phase through &hat is co$$only referred to as luciddrea$ing(

+n this case" the phase begins *hen the a*areness that a dream is

occurring happens *ithin the dream itself. 3fter becoming conscious

*hile dreaming" seeral types of actions can be performed" includingreturning to the body and rolling out" *hich *ill be described later.0hen deepening techni4ues are applied in the conte&t of a conscious

dream" the sensory perceptions of the phase surpass those of normal

*a!efulness.

Techni4ues that facilitate dream consciousness are usually

categori?ed separately from methods used to perform out%of%body

traelJ in practice" ho*eer" it is apparent that the characteristics of

dream consciousness and out%of%body trael are identical" *hich places both phenomena directly in the phase. These practices are

difficult because" unli!e other techni4ues" they do not inole

specific actions that produce instantaneous results. 3 large measure

of preparatory steps must be obsered that re4uire time and effort

*ithout any guarantee of results. 8o*eer" dream consciousnesstechni4ues are not as difficult as direct techni4ues. Moreoer" the

ma'ority of practitioners" *hether using indirect or direct techni4ues"

e&perience spontaneous a*areness *hile dreaming *ithout haing to

apply techni4ues aimed at dream consciousness.

+n addition to the techni4ues described aboe" there are also non%autonomous means and tools/ arious deices" programs" e&ternal

influences" and so forth" *hich can be used to enter the phase. +t is

necessary to mention that these are only useful to practitioners *ho

are able to enter the phase *ithout supplementary assistance.

1>



;arious chemical substances and herbal supplements hae beenrecommended to assist phase entrance" though using them is unli!ely

to do any good" and use of these has neer yielded the effect that can

be achieed through unadulterated practice. 3s such" the use of a

chemical crutch is regarded here as completely unacceptable.

CO+$:6I+(IC6$IO+S

E&act scientific proof that entering the phase is dangerous I or

een safe % does not e&istJ there has neer been an e&haustie"

controlled study to proe either supposition. 8o*eer" since the

phase e&ists at the fringes of naturally%occurring states of mind" it canhardly be assumed dangerous. otably" the phase is accompanied byrapid eye moement (REM)" *hich eery human e&periences for up

to - hours each night" and this begins to e&plain the phase e&perience

as entirely safe and natural.

3lready confirmed are the psychological influences of the phase

on the physical mind and bodyJ namely" the emotional effects that

can occur during the onset of the phase state.

Phase entry is a ery profound" incredible e&perience that mayinduce fear" *hich is ino!ed by a natural instinct for self%

preseration. The phase can create stress. This is especially true for

noices and those poorly ac4uainted *ith the nature of the

phenomenon and techni4ues used to control it. 0ithout !no*ledge

and proper practice" a fear%induced reaction can escalate into full% blo*n terror. 3fter all" *hile in the phase" fantasy 4uic!ly becomes

reality" and reticent fears can ta!e on hyper%realistic 4ualities. 0hen

this occurs" its not the phase enironment" but the fear that is

treacherous. +t goes *ithout saying that fear is a to&ic influence"

especially to sensitie souls" the elderly" and people *ith physical

ailments" li!e certain cardioascular conditions. This does not meanthat persons in these groups should abstain from practicing the phase.

The solution is to learn about and aoid common stressors associated

*ith the practice" !no* the mechanics of controlling ob'ects" and

understand the principles of ma!ing an emergency e&it.

1@



5ien the possibility of negatie phase e&periences" it could beadised that practitioners limit the time in phase to fifteen minutes"

though it is 4uite e&ceptional to maintain the phase for such duration.

Proposed time limits are entirely theoretical and motiated by the fact

that natural REM does not normally last longer than fifteen minutes"and" at the ris! of side effects due to the alteration of natural cycles"

e&periments directed at unnaturally prolonging REM are notrecommended.

:ECO,,E+(6$IO+S

2O: USI+ $9E UI(EBOO>

9uring classroom instruction at the 6chool of Out%of%7odyTrael" seeral !ey factors are !no*n to produce positie and

negatie effects to*ard the li!elihood of success during indiidual

practice/

Po&iti?e Effe!t on Pra!ti!e +egati?e Effe!t on Pra!ti!e

3ttentie" thorough study of thecourse material

8asty and inattentie study ofcourse materials.

onsistent *or! *ith practical

elements.

+nconsistent application of

techni4ues.

9iligent completion of technical

elements.

3ppro&imating the techni4ues

outside of recommended

guidelines.

3 rela&ed approach to the sub'ectmatter. 3 hysterical approach to thematter" #idLe fi&e$.

Deeping a 'ournal of all initial

attempts" follo*ed by recording

successful phase entrances.

3 lac! of personal analysis *hen

problems or a lac! of success are

encountered.

3dhering to the recommended

number of daily entrance

attempts.

E&cessie number of attempts per

day.

Regular attempts and practice. 6poradic practice regimen.

1A



nderstanding that the author

!no*s his field *ell

#+ also !no* eerything + need to

and *ill do as + *ant. This

attitude is good only for those

*ho hae a great amount of real practical e&perience. Reading a

lot on the sub'ect or simply

haing !no*ledge of it is not

e&perience.

Eer!i&e& for Chapter 1

=ue&tion&

1. 0hich alternatie states are included in the term

#phase$

-. 8o* does the phase differ from out%of%body trael:. +s the perception of reality different in *a!ing life than

in the phase *orld

<. 9oes the phase hae applications to day%to%day life

=. 0hat s!ills must be learned before proceeding to

practical use of the phase

>. 8o* many types of autonomous phase entrancetechni4ues are there

@. 0hat is the difference bet*een direct and indirect

techni4ues

A. 0hich techni4ues are easiest for the ma'ority of

practitionersB. +s it *orth trusting arious deices and programs that promise to be able to help one enter the phase state

0hy or *hy not

1C. 6hould one eat meat *hen practicing the phase

1B



$a&"&

1. Try to remember if you hae e&perienced phase

encounters in the past.

-. +f you hae encountered the phase" *hat type oftechni4ue gained entranceJ direct" indirect" or conscious

dreaming

:. +f possible" as! some friends and ac4uaintances about

the sub'ect of out%of%body trael or conscious dreaming.

9o any of them remember a similar e&perience 0hat

*as it li!e



Chapter # – Indire!t $e!hni%ue&

$9E CO+CEP$ O2 I+(I:EC$ $EC9+I=UES

5enuine practice of phase entrance is best begun *ith the easiest"

most accessible methods/ indirect techni4ues" *hich are conscious

actions performed upon a*a!ening from sleep. 6ome criticsincorrectly assume that indirect techni4ues are not ideal" and prefer to

start *ith direct techni4ues. 8o*eer" doing so proides no guarantee

for success and results in a large amount of *asted time and effort.Starting practice &ith indirect techni4ues guarantees entrance into

the phase(

3 specific uniersal techni4ue that suits eery practitioner is a

myth since indiiduals differ *idely in personality" psychology" and

learning speed. 8o*eer" there is a relatiely easy uniersal

algorithm" or procedure" that accounts for the characteristics of each person and allo*s for the most rational" effectie *ay to attain the

initial phase entrances. This algorithm encompasses cyclic practicing

of the indirect techni4ues coered in this chapter. 0ithout e&ception"

these techni4ues % despite their arying degrees of difficulty % are

suitable for eery practitioner *ho *ishes to e&perience the phase.

Results can be e&pected immediately follo*ing the first fe*attemptsJ ho*eer" to achiee measurable results" an aerage of fie

daily" conscious attempts must be made. Ma!ing more than fie

attempts oer the course of a day is fine" too. There is nothing

difficult to understand about performing the techni4ues since they are

clearly laid out and based on real internal processes. Re$ar+a"ly, due

to correctly practiced indirect techni4ues, $ore than half of students

at the live school attain phase entrance after only t&o days(



Interesting Fact!

Many e#perienced practitioners prefer to "ypass

the effort associated &ith direct techni4ues and

hone their s+ills through the sole use of indirect

techni4ues(

+n order to ensure that ones efforts are most fruitful and

productie" *e are going to indiidually e&amine each step and

principle behind the actions in great detail. 2et us start from a

description of the techni4ues themseles" *hich *ill actually apply

practically 'ust as much to direct techni4ues as to indirect techni4uesJ

as they only differ in character and length of application.There are plenty of techni4ues" so after practicing all of the indirect

techni4ues presented in this chapter" a practitioner should be able to

choose three or four of the most straightfor*ard" indiidually

effectie methods.

6eparation techni4ues *ill be e&amined later. They are completelydifferent from usual techni4ues" *hich only bring one into the phase"

but do not necessarily themseles lead to separation from the body. +t

is often also necessary to !no* ho* to stop perceiing ones physical body after employing these techni4ues.

+t is necessary to understand *hen to employ these techni4ues" and

the importance of *a!ing from sleep *ithout opening the eyes ormoing the body. 3ttempting to enter the phase immediately upon

a*a!ening must be learned and practiced to mastery since it

constitutes the main barrier to successful practice.

3fter e&amining the peripheral information surrounding indirecttechni4ues" the cycles of indirect techni4ues *ill be e&amined"

including *hat there are" ho* they *or!" and ho* they are best used.6uccessful phase entrance is the direct result of performing these

cycles. 8o*eer" there are e&ceptions" and it is not completely

necessary to proceed *ith these cycles if oneGs o*n mind someho*

hints *hat e&actly one should start from" *hich *e *ill also e&amine

separately.



P:I,6:Y I+(I:EC$ $EC9+I=UES

/ota Bene The techni4ues described belo* are the simple

components of indirect techni4ue cycles. +mplementing each

techni4ues description is far from effectie. Of the list gien belo*"

it behooes the indiidual practitioner to choose the most

comprehensible and interesting techni4ues" then actiely study and

apply the instructions for use.

OBSE:@I+ I,6ES

$e&ting Indi?idual Effe!ti?ene&&

+mmediately after *a!ing from sleep" remain motionless" eyes

closed. Obsere the blan! space behind the eyes for : to = secondsand try to locate recogni?able pictures" images" or symbols. +f nothing

appears during this e&ercise" the techni4ue should be substituted. +f

something appears" continue to passiely obsere the images.

Mean*hile" the images *ill become increasingly realistic" literally

eneloping the practitioner. 9o not aggressiely e&amine the details



of the image" or it *ill anish or change. The image should be

e&perienced as a panorama" ta!ing eerything in. Obsere the images

as long as the 4uality and realism increases. 9oing so yields t*o

possible results/ the practitioner becomes part of the surroundings"

and has achieed the phase" or the image becomes borderline orabsolutely realistic" and separation from the physical body is

possible.

$raining

To train the use of this techni4ue" lie do*n in the dar!" eyes closed"

and obsere the blac!ness for seeral minutes" identifying any

specific images that may arise from simple spots or floaters" and thengradually transition to *hole pictures" scenes" or scenarios. 0ith

practice" this techni4ue is ery easy and straightfor*ard. 3 common

mista!e made during practice of this techni4ue is *hen the

practitioner aggressiely attempts to con'ure images ersus passiely

obsering *hat is naturally presented.

P96+$O, WI<I+ A,O@E,E+$



closed. Try to *iggle a part of the body for : to = seconds" but*ithout using any muscles. +f nothing moes during the attempt" try a

different techni4ue. +f a sensation of *iggling occurs" een in the

slightest" continue to employ the techni4ue" striing to increase the

range of moement as much as possible. This techni4ue should be performed ery aggressiely" not passiely. 3s soon as the range of

moement nears or e&ceeds four inches % *hich may ta!e 'ust seeralseconds % the follo*ing situations may arise/ one momentarily finds

oneself someho* in the phase" or the *iggled part of the body begins

to moe freely. The occurrence of moement during practice of this

techni4ue allo*s the practitioner to transition to a separation

techni4ue and attempt to leae the body.



0hile practicing phantom *iggling" strong ibrations may occur"

amid *hich separation may be attempted. 6ounds also often arise"

allo*ing the opportunity to practice listening in" *hich can lead to

phase entrance.

The phantom *iggling techni4ue is not meant to produce animagined moement by a phantom body. The point of the techni4ue

is to attempt the moement of a physical body part *ithout using

muscular action. That is" the focus should rest upon an internal

intention of moement *ithout physical action. 0hen the sensation

occurs" it differs little from its real counterpart and is often

accompanied by heainess and resistance. 5enerally" there is ery

little range of moement at first" but *ith concentrated effort therange of moement noticeably increases.

+t does not matter *hich part of the body is used to e&ercise

phantom moement. +t may be the *hole body or 'ust one finger.

either is the speed of the moement important. +ncreased range of

perceied moement is the aim of the techni4ue.

$raining

To train the techni4ue of phantom *iggling" rela& a hand for

seeral minutes *hile lying do*n" eyes closed. Then" aggressiely

enision the follo*ing hand moements" *ithout moing anymuscles" for t*o to three minutes each/ rotating" up%do*n" left%right"

e&tending the fingers and dra*ing the fingers together" clenching and

unclenching a fist. o sensations *ill occur at first. 5radually" the

sensation of muscular action *ill become so apparent that the perceied moement *ill be indistinguishable from real moement.

9uring the first training attempts" practitioners are often tempted toopen their eyes to see if actual moement is occurring I thats ho*

real the sensation feels.

<IS$E+I+ I+





closed. Try to listen to noise in your head. 9o this for : to = seconds

*ithout moing and *ithout opening the eyes. +f nothing happens

during this period of time" s*itch to another techni4ue. +f any sounds

li!e bu??ing" humming" raing" hissing" *histling" tin!ling" ormelodies occur" listen attentiely. 0ith results" the sound *ill

increase in olume. 2isten in as long as there is some dynamism in

the olume of the sound. 0hen the sound stops" or the noise becomes

loud enough" a separation techni4ue may be attempted. 6ometimes"

the noise itself thro*s one into the phase *hile listening. 3t a certain

stage" sounds may be e&tremely loud and hae een been described

as comparable to the roar of a 'et%engine. The action of listening in consists of actiely and attentiely

e&ploring a sound" the *hole of its tonality and range" and ho* it

reacts to the listener.

There is an optional techni4ue !no*n as for!ed li&tening in" *here

it is simply necessary to strongly *ant to hear noise" and mean*hilema!e intuitie internal efforts" *hich" as a rule" are correct.

Performed correctly" forced sounds *ill intensify the same *ay as

those perceied *ith the standard listening in techni4ue.

$raining

+n order to practice listening in" lie do*n in a silent place" eyesclosed" and listen for sounds originating in the head. These attempts

are usually cro*ned *ith success *ithin seeral minutes of trying"

and one starts to hear that noise that absolutely eeryone has *ithin.

One simply has to !no* ho* to tune in to it.

:O$6$IO+



closed. +magine the physical body is rotating along an a&is for = to 1C

seconds. +f no unusual sensations occur" try another techni4ue. +f

ibrations occur during rotation or the moement suddenly feels



realistic" then continue the rotation techni4ue as long as there is

progress in the sensations deelopment. There are seeral possible

outcomes *hen rotation is practiced. The imagined rotation is

replaced by a ery real sensation of rotating along an imagined a&is.

0hen this occurs" a practitioner may easily leae the body. The otheroutcome is the sudden presence of strong ibrations or loud sounds"

amid *hich separation from the body is possible. 9uring rotation"

separation has been !no*n to spontaneously occur and the

practitioner enters the phase.

$raining

To practice rotation" imagine reoling around the head%to%foota&is for seeral minutes *hile lying do*n" eyes closed. +t is not

necessary to focus on the isual effects of rotation or minute

sensations in the body. The !ey factor is the estibular sensation that

arises from internal rotation. 3s a rule" many practitioners e&perience

difficulty performing full rotation. One person may be limited to BCdegrees of moement *here another e&periences 1AC degrees. 0ith

consistent" correct practice" full :>C degree rotation *ill occur.

2O:CE( 26<<I+ 6S<EEP



closed. Picture a s*ift" compulsory fall into sleep for = to 1C seconds"

and then return to *a!efulness" follo*ed by an aggressie attempt at

separating from the physical body. 5enerally" after performing thistechni4ue" the practitioners state of mind 4uic!ly transitions bet*een

different states of brain. 6trong ibrations often occur *hen emergingfrom this #pseudo%sleep$" *here the li!elihood of separation from the

body is increased" accompanied the opportunity to practice other

techni4ues. Resist actually falling asleep during this e&ercise.

+n essence" forced falling asleep is a tric! on the mind designed to

ta!e adantage of the brains refle&ie responses to actions that

immediately induce semi%conscious states that allo* easy entrance



into the phase. Employing it is especially effectie upon an e&tremely

alert a*a!ening" or after a moement is unintentionally made upon

a*a!ening.

Forced sleep is 4uite simple. +t re4uires a cessation of internal

dialogue" shifting mental focus a*ay from e&ternal stimuli" and astrong desire for a 4uic! reentrance to the sleeping state follo*ed by

rene*ed *a!efulness after seeral seconds. +n order to understand

ho* this is done" it is sufficient to recall ho* one had urgently made

oneself fall asleep before" or ho* one had fallen asleep after haing

been e&hausted" or after a long period of sleep depriation.

3 common mista!e in practice occurs *hen people fall asleep

after attempting the techni4ue" forgetting the necessary desire to4uic!ly return to consciousness.

SECO+(6:Y I+(I:EC$ $EC9+I=UES

S$:6I+I+ $9E B:6I+


+mmediately after *a!ing from sleep" remain motionless" eyesclosed. Ma!e - to : s4uee?es straining the brain. This is !no*n as

straining the brain. +f nothing happens" try another techni4ue. +f

ibrations occur during this e&ercise" try to moe the ibrationsaround the body and amplify them by continuing to strain the brain.

The stronger the ibrations" the higher the probability that a

separation techni4ue may be applied. 6pontaneous separation may

occur. 0hile straining the brain" a practitioner may e&perience thesounds necessary for transitioning to a listening in techni4ue.

The ibrations that arise from straining the brain are ery stri!ing.+f there is any doubt as to *hether the ibrations happened" then most

li!ely a practitioner did not e&perience them. The ibrations may be

described as an intense" painless electrical current moing through or

gripping the body. 3t times" the sensation of a total numbing of the

body is e&perienced.



$raining

To practice straining the brain" lie do*n" eyes closed" and attempt

to strain the brain. 9o not thin! about the fact that actually s4uee?ing

the brain is impossible. The imagined straining should be spasmodic"

rhythmic. Practitioners may strain the entire brain or specific parts ofit. 9uring the process" a sensation of pressure or een real strain

arises in the brain. 0ith B=K of practitioners" this strain usually

occurs *ithin the first fe* minutes of e&ercise. This techni4ue should

be committed to memory *hen training so that it may be instantly

recalled and practiced upon a*a!ening from sleep.

Practitioners often ma!e the mista!e of unintentionally straining

their facial and nec! muscles instead of straining the interior of theirheads. This error should be aoided at all costs" lest it become a habit

that frustrates genuine practice.

S$:6I+I+ $9E BO(Y WI$9OU$ USI+ ,USC<ES


This techni4ue inoles straining the *hole body and differs little

from straining the brain. 0hen a*a!ening from sleep" ma!e one tothree attempts at straining the *hole body" refraining from actually

fle&ing any physical muscle. +f nothing happens" try another

techni4ue. ;ibrations may occur as a result" and amplifying these bystraining the body *ithout using muscles can induce a spontaneous

separation from the body. 0hen the ibrations become strong

enough" attempt a separation techni4ue. 6ounds often arise during the

ibration *hich allo* for listening in and a subse4uent entrance tothe phase.

$raining

To practice/ *hile lying do*n" eyes closed" try to strain the entire

body *ithout using physical muscles for seeral minutes. Tingling"

internal pressure" and a strain on the brain often occur during this

e&ercise. Remember to aoid straining any real muscles. +f physical



strain occurs" results may be forfeited in the critical moment of

fruition.

@ISU6<I6$IO+


closed. For three to fie seconds" con'ure an intense desire to see and

literally create a specific ob'ect. The ob'ect should be enisioned at

rest" about four to eight inches from the practitioner. 2imit the

isuali?ation to simple" familiar ob'ects" li!e an apple" flo*er" sphere"

or hand. 6ometimes it is useful to imagine an ob'ect floating 'ust

aboe the eyebro*s instead of directly in front. +f nothing appearsduring this period of time" a different techni4ue should be used.

+f an ob'ect appears" one should !eep loo!ing hard at it" and at a

certain moment one *ill reali?e that one is already standing ne&t to it

some*here in the *orld of the phase. 0hen the ob'ect becomes

realistic" one can also try to separate from ones body on ones o*n.

SE+SO:Y-,O$O: @ISU6<I6$IO+


closed. +magine actie" physical moement for 1C to 1= seconds

*hile touching an actual ob'ect and simultaneously e&amining theimagined details of the room. +f nothing appears during this period of

time" a different techni4ue should be used. +f real and imagined

sensations become mi&ed" then continue the practice until the

imagined sensations oercome the primary senses.

I,6I+E( ,O@E,E+$


closed. For = to 1C seconds" concentrate on isuali?ing any of the

follo*ing actions/ *iggling" *al!ing" running" somersaulting" pulling

a rope" or s*imming. Try to imagine the moement as a realistic and

actie eent during the practice period. +f nothing happens" a



different techni4ue should be employed. +f results occur in the form

of the sensation of mobility" the imagined moement should be

continued until it becomes the dominant sensation. 0hen the

moement achiees primacy" it is accompanied by translocation to

the phase. +f such a translocation does not automatically occur" aseparation techni4ue is recommended.

I,6I+E( SE+S6$IO+S


closed. For three to fie seconds" enision that a specific ob'ect is

being held in the hand. +f nothing happens" a different techni4ueshould be practiced. +f the impression of shape and *eight become

apparent" concentrate harder on the sensation" trying to compound the

e&perience. Once the ob'ects presence in the hand achiees a

realistic 4uality" separation is possible. 8o*eer" it is preferable to

continue handling the ob'ect. 3 practitioner is free to imagine anytype of ob'ect that fits in the hand. E&amples include a telephone" a

drin!ing glass" a remote control" a ball" a pen" or a bo&.

I,6I+E( SOU+(S

pon a*a!ening" *ithout moing or opening ones eyes" oneshould actiely try to hear a specific sound or *ord" e.g. someones

name or a melody. +f nothing happens" the techni4ue should be

changed for another one. +f sound arises" one should try to listen in to

it. 0hen it pea!s in olume" one may try to separate.

EYE ,O@E,E+$


closed. Perform t*o to fie sharp left%right or up%do*n eye

moements. +f nothing happens" the techni4ue should be e&changed

for another. +f ibrations occur" separation may be attempted after

efforts to intensify the ibrations.



(O$ O+ $9E 2O:E9E6(


closed. For three to fie seconds" isuali?e a point in the middle ofthe forehead. +f nothing happens" a different techni4ue should be

used. +f ibrations occur" they may be intensified by using this

techni4ue or by straining the brain" facilitating separation from the

body. 3lso" sounds may arise that allo* the practice of listening in.

2E6: ,E$9O(


closed. For three to fie seconds" imagine something horrific and

graeyard%related staying nearby" something graphic" macabre" out of

the *orst nightmare imaginable. +f nothing happens" a different

techni4ue should be employed. 8o*eer" acute fear may occur" mostli!ely forcing the practitioner into the phase *here a separation

techni4ue may be applied. 3lternatiely" ibrations or noise may

arise and allo* the use of other indirect techni4ues. 3 common problem *ith the use of this techni4ue is that fear often ma!es the

practitioner so uncomfortable in the phase that he desires nothing else

than to return to *a!efulness.

:EC6<<I+ $9E P96SE S$6$E

+mmediately after *a!ing from sleep" remain motionless" eyesclosed. For three to fie seconds" recall the sensations that

accompanied a preious phase e&perience. (This only *or!s if the practitioner has achieed phase entrance in the past.) Either nothing

*ill happen and a different techni4ue should be used or these

sensations *ill be recalled and separating from the body may be tried

% if it doesnt occur spontaneously. ;ibrations or noise may also arise

during this techni4ue" in *hich case listening in or straining the brain

may be practiced.



B:E6$9I+ CO+CE+$:6$IO+


closed. For three to fie seconds" focus on breathingJ the rise and fallof the rib cage" the inflation and deflation of the lungs" the inta!e and

escape of air. +f no results occur" a different techni4ue should be

used. +f ibrations" noise" or spontaneous separation occur" the

practice of this techni4ue should be intensified and used to its full

adantage.

SE<EC$I+ $9E :I9$ $EC9+I=UES

The ne&t step to mastering indirect techni4ues is choosing the

right techni4ues that suit indiidual predispositions. There is no point

in going for one techni4ue or another only because they loo!

interesting and because someone *rote a lot or spo!e a lot aboutthem. The choice should be based strictly upon *hat suits an

indiidual practitioner.

Out of all of the enumerated primary indirect techni4ues" practically only straining the brain *or!s easily and 4uic!ly for B=K

of practitioners. 3ll other techni4ues *or! immediately for only

about -=K to =CK of practitioners during initial training. 8o*eer"after seeral training sessions" each techni4ue yields results for @=K

of engaged practitioners.

One *ay or another" eery practitioner should identify a certain

set of techni4ues that *or!s best. 3 set should consist of no less thanthree techni4uesJ four or fie is een better to allo* more options and

practical combinations. on%*or!ing techni4ues should not bediscarded *holesale by the indiidual because they afford an

opportunity to achiee success through ne*" preiously unresponsie

e&periences.

To ensure the correct selection of techni4ues" each should be

separately practiced oer a period of at least three days. To this end"

one should e&periment *ith each of the primary techni4ues for - to



1C minutes before falling asleep" or een during the day. +t is good to

choose at least one secondary techni4ue practice. This regimen

allo*s a precise determination of the techni4ues that *ill yield the

best results for the practitioner. 9uring the process of selecting

personali?ed techni4ues" a practitioner learns and retains thetechni4ues in an intimate" personal *ay" *hich positiely affects ho*

techni4ues are used during critical moments.

+t is *orth noting that the final selection of techni4ues should be

aried. For e&ample" choosing both straining the brain and straining

the body *ithout using muscles is pointless because they are

practically one and the same. More often than not" they *ill both

either *or! or not *or!. This is *hy techni4ues should inolearious types of sensory perception/ isual" audio" !inesthetic"

estibular" imaginary sense perception" and internal strain.

Remember that priorities and goals change *ith time" and that a

techni4ue that fell flat during initial attempts may une&pectedly proe

aluable later on. 7e fle&ible. o set of techni4ues should be caredin stone. +n fact" the set may change seeral times oer the first fe*

*ee!s as the practitioner discoers *hat produces the best indiidual

results. To close this section" a list has been proided" detailing the most

effectie indirect techni4ues. This list *as compiled *ith classroom

data from the 6chool of Out%of%7ody Trael and may proe helpfulin determining an effectie set of indirect techni4ues.

$he ,o&t Effe!ti?e Indire!t $e!hni%ue& at S!hool of Out-of-

Body $ra?el Seminar&Obsering +mages 1=K

Phantom 0iggling 1=K

2istening in 1=K

Rotation 1CK

6training the 7rain =K

6training the 7ody 0ithout sing Muscles =K

Forced Falling 3sleep =K

Mi&ture of Techni4ues 1CK



Other Techni4ues -CK

SEP6:6$IO+ $EC9+I=UES

2et us begin *ith a totally shoc!ing fact/ during one%third of

successful indirect entries into the phase" it is not necessary to

perform any specific phase entry techni4ues" as separation techni4ues

are immediately successfulN This has been statistically proen at

6chool of Out%of%7ody Trael seminars and in the analyses of other

sources. onersely" an incorrect understanding of separationtechni4ues may lead to undesirable conse4uences. +t is possible for a

practitioner to enter the phase state and be unable to separate from the body. Therefore" it is ery important to understand ho* separation

techni4ues *or! since they are often a !ey to success.

Interesting Fact!

Relatively often, a practitioner &ill try to e$ploy

separation techni4ues to no effect, ho&ever, he &ill

later une#pectedly understand that he had "een

lying in a different position than he sensed that he

&as in, and in fact, it had only "een necessary for

hi$ to stand up( This happens $ostly a$ong"eginners and is indicative of an incorrect

understanding of separation techni4ues(

3t times a practitioner may only need to thin! about separation and

it happens. This is a rarity" *hich e&plains the e&istence of a *holeseries of au&iliary techni4ues. The most important separationtechni4ues are rolling out" getting up" climbing out" and leitation.

:O<<I+ OU$

0hile a*a!ening" attempt to roll oer to the edge of the bed or the

*all *ithout using any muscles. 9ont *orry about falling out of bed"



hitting the *all" or be concerned *ith the details of ho* this

techni4ue should feel. ust roll.

E$$I+ UP

pon a*a!ening" attempt to get out of bed *ithout physical

e&ertion. This should be performed in a *ay that is most comfortable

for the practitioner.

C<I,BI+ OU$

0hile a*a!ening" try to climb out of the body *ithout using anymuscles. This techni4ue generally comes to mind *hen a partial

separation has been achieed through the use of other techni4ues" or

one part of the body has completely separated.

<E@I$6$IO+

pon a*a!ening" attempt to leitate up*ard" parallel to the bed.

0hile attempting to leitate" do not *onder ho* it should beaccomplishedJ eeryone intuitiely !no*s ho* to leitate from their

e&periences in dreams.

26<<I+ OU$

Practically the same as leitation/ upon a*a!ening" try to sin!

do*n through the bed.

PU<<I+ OU$

8ere" upon a*a!ening" try to e&it the body through the head" as if

escaping from a lidded cocoon.

B6C>W6:(S :O<<



3fter a*a!ening" try to perform a bac!*ards somersault oer the

head *ithout using any physical muscles.

BU<E $9E EYESD

pon a*a!ening" bulge out or *iden the eyes *ithout opening

them. Frontal moement to*ard separation may result.

6eparation techni4ues are united by a singular idea/ nothing

should be imagined" moement should be attempted *ithout the use

of physical muscles. The techni4ues produce the same sensations of

moement felt in real life. +f nothing happens immediately aftertrying" then the techni4ue is not going to *or!" though it may delier

results at a later time. 3 practitioner *ill instantly be able to

recogni?e if the techni4ue has *or!ed. 8o*eer" people are often

unprepared for the realness of the sensations and thin! that they are

ma!ing a physical moement instead of reali?ing that a part or all ofthe body has separated. 3fter this unfortunate failure" careful analysis

helps to understand *hat happened and plan for a successful retry.

+f separation *as incomplete or too! place *ith some difficulty"this is a signal that the techni4ue is being performed correctly.

6trength and aggressie effort are re4uired from this point to achiee

complete separation. For e&ample" if some moement began and thenstopped after haing made some progress" then one should go bac!

and moe een harder once again in the same direction.

+n order to practice separation techni4ues" lie do*n *ith the eyes

closed and attempt all of them oer the course of seeral minutes.6eparation has li!ely been accomplished if no muscles t*itch or

strain and a sensation of moement occurs. There *ill be a strong"almost physically palpable internal effort to perform a moement.

aturally" no physical moement actually occurs and the practitioner

remains prone and immobileJ ho*eer" at the right moment" these

actions *ill lead to an easy entrance into the phase.

Interesting Fact!



%ppro#i$ately 17 to 87 of the ti$e that the

phase is practiced, one reali*es i$$ediately upon

a&a+ening that one has already separated( This

$eans that one $ay already go so$e&here and

stand, lie do&n, sit do&n, etc( This is not ho&ever

"eco$ing conscious in a drea$, "ut an actuallya&a+ening(

$9E BES$ $I,E $O P:6C$ICE

The !ey to practice is the 4uantity and 4uality of attempts made

that hone a practitioners s!ills. There are seeral *indo*s of time best suited for employing indirect techni4ues.

To begin" it should be stated that sleep follo*s a cyclical pattern.

0e a*a!en eery hour%and%a%half and then 4uic!ly fall asleep again"

*hich gies rise to sleep cycles. Furthermore" *e e&perience t*o

primary stages of sleep/ rapid eye moement (REM) sleep" and non%rapid eye moement (REM) sleep. REM sleep includes many

internal stages. The more *e sleep" the less the body needs deep

REM sleep" and the more time *e spend in REM sleep. Phaseentrance is most li!ely to occur during REM sleep.

The best *ay to implement indirect techni4ues is by the deferred$ethod . The aim of the method is to interrupt a sleep cycle during its



final stage and then disrupt it again after falling bac! to sleep" *hich

ma!es sleep light during the rest of the sleep cycle. 6leep

accompanied by fre4uent interruptions can be put to productie uses.

For e&ample" if a practitioner (lets call him ac!) goes to sleep at

midnight" then ac! should set an alarm for > ocloc! in the morning.pon a*a!ening" ac! should engage in some sort of physical

actiity" li!e going to the bathroom" getting a drin! of *ater" or

reading a fe* pages of this boo!. 3fter*ard" ac! should go bac! to

bed thin!ing about ho*" *ithin the ne&t t*o to four hours" he *ill

*a!e up multiple times and ma!e an attempt to enter the phase

during each a*a!ening.

+f ac! goes to bed earlier" then his alarm cloc! should be set bac! by that amount of time" since si& hours of initial sleep is the optimal

length of time. +f ac! sleeps less than si& hours" then the second half

of his nights sleep *ill be too deep. +f ac! sleeps longer than si&

hours" then there *ill be little time remaining for attempts" or ac!

may not een be able to fall asleep. +f a practitioner naturally *a!es up in a forceful manner" it *ill be

difficult to regain sleep. Thus" it *ill not be necessary for the

practitioner to get out of bed *ith the aid of an alarm. The practitioner should attempt to go right bac! to sleep.

aturally" the deferred method is most applicable in cases *here

it is possible to sleep as long as a practitioner desires" *ithout haingto *a!e up early. ot eeryone en'oys such lu&ury on a daily basis"

but nearly eeryone has days off *hen time may be set aside to

practice the deferred method. t is in large $easure due to the

deferred $ethod that classroo$ courses at the School of Out-of-BodyTravel allo& up to 298 of class participants to enter the phase in the

course of a single &ee+end The second most effectie *indo* of time for entering the phase

is ordinary $orning a&a+ening( This generally occurs during light

slumber follo*ing a full nights sleep.

3nother effectie time to practice indirect techni4ues is after

a*a!ening from a daytime nap. Once again" this type of sleep *ill be

light and short" *hich proides the body needed rest *hile allo*ing



memory and intention to be !ept intact through the moment of

a*a!ening. 3gain" not eeryone has the lu&ury of ta!ing daytime

naps" but if such a chance arises" then it *ould be ery beneficial to

ta!e adantage of the opportunity.

/ightti$e a&a+enings are the least effectie times for phasee&perimentation because the brain still re4uires a lot of deep sleep at

this time. 3*a!ening at night" the mind is 4uite *ea! and hardly

capable of any effort. Een if some results are obsered" a*a!ening

often ends *ith 4uic!ly falling bac! asleep. This is not to say that

normal practice of the phase cannot occur at nightJ it 'ust *ont be as

effectie as at other times. The nighttime option is best for those *ho

lac! an opportunity to use other *indo*s of time for practicing the phase.

nderstand that *e a*a!en at night eery BC minutes" *hich is

*hy a minimum of four a*a!enings is almost guaranteed *hen

sleeping" een for 'ust si& hours. 0hen the practitioner !no*s about

this and stries to sei?e those moments" *ith time he *ill actuallysei?e them and ta!e adantage of them.

CO+SCIOUS 6W6>E+I+

:onscious a&a+ening is *a!ing up *ith a particular thought in

mindJ ideally" a thought about indirect techni4ues. +n order to startusing indirect techni4ues upon a*a!ening" it is not sufficient to hae

a cursory !no*ledge of the techni4ues to be used *hen *a!ing. 9ue

to the peculiarities of the human mind and its habits" it is not al*ays

easy *hen *a!ing to recall any particular motie or idea. The goal ofconscious a*a!ening is to practice instant action *ithout being idle

after *a!ing up.

Interesting Fact!

There e#ists a "elief that the pheno$enon of out-

of-"ody travel is practically unattaina"le, and is

accessi"le only to an elect fe& through practices

that re4uire secret +no&ledge( 0o&ever, the



greatest difficulty &hen trying to e#perience out-of-

"ody travel in a short period of ti$e lies only in

i$$ediately re$e$"ering a"out the techni4ues

upon a&a+ening &ithout $oving( This is all si$ple

and straightfor&ard( But it is precisely this trifle

that is the largest stu$"ling "loc+ &hen trying toe#perience such an unco$$on pheno$enon(

This is not difficult at all for appro&imately -=K of the

population. 8o*eer" for the other three%4uarters of the population"

this is an difficult barrier to entry that can een seem insurmountable.

+f such thoughts arise" one should simply understand that this cannot be so" and that persistent attempts and training are the !ey solution.

The reasons *hy people are unable to remember practicing the

phase upon a*a!ening are/ not being in the habit of immediately

doing anything upon a*a!ening" a desire to sleep longer" a desire to

go to the bathroom" being thirsty" a desire to suddenly start solingday%to%day problems" and so on.

onscious a*a!ening *ith the intent of attempting an indirect

techni4ue should be a practitioners primary goal" *hich should be pursued at eery cost. The speed at *hich the phase is learned and

e&perienced depends on this.

There are seeral effectie tric!s to learning consciousa*a!ening/

ntention upon falling asleep' This is the ery important to

successfully achieing conscious a*a!ening. 3 ery clear scientific

fact has been proen by somnologists (scientists *ho study sleep)/upon a*a!ening" people usually thin! about *hat they had been

thin!ing about before falling asleep. This phenomenon is easy toobsere if the sleeper is e&perience a serious life problemJ they fall

asleep *ith the problem and *a!e *ith it. 6o" in a case li!e this" if

difficulties at the front of the mind are replaced *ith a desire to

practice the phase" this *ill produce the desired effect. +t is not

necessary to thin! solely about conscious a*a!ening *hile falling

asleep. +t is sufficient to simply affirm the intention clearly and



distinctly" een state the intention out loud. Practicing these types of

conscious actions *hile entering sleep *ill do much to promote the

success of indirect techni4ues upon a*a!ening.

;eneral intent' The more clearly a practitioner concentrates on the

importance and necessity of *a!ing up and immediatelyremembering to practice the techni4ues" the more solid the intent *ill

become" and the more li!ely the process *ill fulfill its role and

actually lead to results.

%ffir$ing desires' 6ometimes an internal intention is simply not

enough for some people" or they are unable to properly affirm one by

irtue of indiidual characteristics. +n this case" an affirmation of

desires should be introduced at the physical leel. This could be inthe form of a note *ith a description of a goal placed ne&t to the bed"

under ones pillo*" or hung on the *all. +t could be a conersation

*ith friends or family about the particular desire" or by repeatedly

ocali?ing the actions that need to be performed upon a*a!ening. +t

could een be an entry in a diary" blog" or te&ting on a mobile phone. %naly*ing unsuccessful a&a+enings( 3naly?ing unsuccessful

attempts at conscious a*a!ening is e&tremely important. 0hen

remembering the failed attempt after seeral minutes" seeral hours"or een later in the day" focus on it and resole to succeed during the

ne&t attempt. 9eep e&ploration of the failure is highly effectie and

practical since the practitioner is learning *hat *or!s" *hat doesnt*or!" and ma!ing healthy resolutions to*ard success.

:reating $otivation' The greater the desire to enter into the phase

to accomplish a goal there" the 4uic!er successful conscious

a*a!ening is achieed. Motiation is be created by a great desire todo or e&perience something in the phase. +n general" preious isits to

the phase are great motiation" but an uninitiated person does not!no* it and *ill need something to *hich they can relate. For some"

this could be a childhood dream of flying to Mars" for others it could

be the opportunity to see a loed one *ho has passed a*ay" for

another it could be the chance to obtain specific information" or

influence the course of a physical illness" and so forth.



3side from natural methods to achiee conscious a*a!ing" there

are arious deices and tools that facilitate a measure of success.

These *ill be coered in hapter = in the section describing non%

autonomous *ays of entering the phase.

The "est $o$ent for conscious a&a+ening is &hile e#iting a

drea$( This is the $ost effective and productive ti$e to atte$pt separation or perfor$ing the techni4ues( 3t this moment" physical

a*areness of the body is at a minimum. 3*areness at the ery end of

a dream often occurs after nightmares" painful e&periences in the

dream" falling dreams I any dream that causes a sudden a*a!ening.

0ith time" one should deelop a refle& that enables one to

perform planned actions at the moment of a*a!ening" but *henconsciousness itself has not yet had time to return. This type of refle&

is highly beneficial to sei?ing the most fruitful of opportunities to

enter the phase.

9ue to arious psychological and physiological factors" it is not

possible for eery person to achiee conscious a*a!ening after eerysleep cycle. Thus" there is no point in becoming upset if conscious

a*a!ening does not occur eery time. E&periencing only - to :

a*a!enings per day is normalJ this is sufficient enough to attempt phase entrance - to = times per *ee! *hen practiced daily.

+t is not *orth getting carried a*ay *ith an e&cessie number of

attempts. 9uring the 6chools courses" it has been noted that doing 1Cconscious a*a!enings or more (some students try -C or een :C) oer

the course of one night and morning rarely yields results. This is due

to the fact that if one sets oneself a goal that is desired so much that

its reali?ation brea!s the natural rhythms of the body" one depriesoneself of the intermediate" transitional states that ma!e the phase

effectie. 3 practitioner may also 4uic!ly become emotionallye&hausted from the large number of attempts and be unable to push

limits in the right direction. The upside is that one *ill simply tire

out. +f that starts to happen" it is better to calm do*n and try to

approach the matter in a more rela&ed manner" eenly and gradually.

6W6>E+I+ WI$9OU$ ,O@I+



3longside remembering the phase immediately upon *a!ing"

another important re4uirement is a*a!ening *ithout moing" *hich

is difficult since many people *a!e up and moe. pon a*a!ening"

scratching" stretching" opening the eyes" and listening to real soundsshould be aoided. 3ny real moement or perception *ill ery

4uic!ly disintegrate the intermediate state and introduce reality" the

actiation of the mind and its connection to the sensory organs.

3t first" a*a!ening *ithout moing seems difficult or een

impossible. 8o*eer" it has been proen that this is remedied for

through actie attempts and the desire to achiee set goals. People

often claim that they cannot a*a!en *ithout moing" that its animpossible e&perience. 8o*eer" after seeral attempts" it *ill

happen" and it *ill occur more and more fre4uently *ith practice.

Thus" if there is difficulty in a*a!ening *ithout moement" do

not despair" 'ust !eep trying. 6ooner or later" the body *ill yield to

the practice" and eerything *ill happen smoothly. 3*a!ening *ithout moing is ery important because" for the

ma'ority of people" e&periments *ith the phase are not possible

e&cept in the first *a!ing moments *here *a!ing *ithout moingsets the stage for successful indirect techni4ue cycles. Often" a

practitioner *ill ma!e 1C unsuccessful attempts and moe *hile

a*a!ening. Once the practitioner learns to consistently *a!e calmlyand gradually" success 4uic!ly follo*s.

8o*eer" if an a*a!ening is conscious" but *ith moement" that

does not mean that the practitioner cannot immediately ma!e an

attempt to fall into the phase. 6uch attempts" although they *ill beabout = times less effectie than usual" should neertheless be made

3ny opportunity to practice *hile *a!ing should not be *asted. +tmust only be !ept in mind that one must first neutrali?e the effects of

the moement in order to once again fall into an intermediate state. +n

the case of moement" it is e&tremely helpful to begin practice *ith

forced falling asleep. 2istening in also *or!s *ell" as does obsering

images and phantom *iggling" each performed passiely for =%1=



seconds" instead of the standard duration of : to = seconds. 3fter

performing these" cycling may begin.

3*a!ening *ithout moement" despite all its importance" is not a

goal in and of itself" and also not *orth suffering oer. 0hen

a*a!ening" if there is great discomfort" something itches" a need tos*allo* arises" or any manner of natural refle&" it is better to deal

*ith it and then act according to practices recommended *hen

moement upon a*a!ening happens.

ot all moements upon a*a!ening are real and" if only for this

reason alone" *hen moement occurs" indirect techni4ues should

follo*.

Interesting Fact!

<p to 27 of sensations and actions that happen

upon a&a+ening are not real as they see$, "ut are

phanto$(

False sensations occur in *idely dierse *ays. People often do not

understand *hat is going on *ith them *ithout haing e&perienced

the phase. For e&ample" a person may thin! they are scratching theirear *ith their physical hand *hen they are really using a phantom

hand. 3 person may hear pseudo%sounds in the room" on the street" or

at the neighbors *ithout noting anything unusual. Or" a person mayloo! around the room *ithout !no*ing that their eyes are actually

closed. +f a practitioner recogni?es such moments for *hat they are"

they may immediately try to separate from the body.

CYC<ES O2 I+(I:EC$ $EC9+I=UES

Thus far" indirect techni4ues used for phase entrance and

techni4ues for separation in the phase hae been coered. onscious

a*a!ening and the best times to practice it hae also been e&amined.

o*" a specific algorithm of action for indirect techni4ues *ill be

presented. Follo*ing this algorithm promises 4uic! and practical

results.



3lgorithm of 3ction upon 3*a!ening/

1. $e&ting Separation $e!hni%ue& 8ithin * Se!ond&

2i!e the preious obseration of separation techni4ues" a third of

successful attempts *ith indirect techni4ues yield immediate success

upon the attempt of a separation techni4ue due to the fact that thefirst seconds after *a!ing up are the most useful for entering the



phase. The less time that has elapsed after a*a!ening" the better.

onersely" if one lies do*n e&pecting something to happen" chances

4uic!ly dissipate.

Thus" upon a*a!ening" preferably *ithout first moing" a

practitioner should immediately try arious separation techni4ues"li!e rolling out" getting up" or leitation. +f a techni4ue suddenly

started to yield results for appro&imately for = seconds" then

separation from the body should be attempted. 6ometimes inertia"

difficulty" or a barrier *ill arise during a separation attempt. o

attention should be gien to these problems. +nstead" resole to

separate % decidedly and aggressiely climb out of the body.

Deep in mind that trying to immediately separate upon a*a!eningis a s!ill of the utmost importanceJ one that is *orth honing from the

ery beginning" neer forgotten.

#. $he Cy!le of Indire!t $e!hni%ue& to U&e if One i& Una3le to

Separate

+f separation does not occur after seeral seconds" it most li!ely

means that separation *ill not occur" regardless of elapsed time in

effort. This is *here the practitioner must resort to other techni4ues. The practitioner should already hae chosen a minimum of three

primary or secondary techni4ues that suit a practical repertoire. 8ere

is *here the techni4ues are put into action.

/ota Bene n order to give a specific e#a$ple, &e &ill e#a$inethe use of three specific techni4ues, &hich should "e replaced &ith a

tested and chosen set of techni4ues( The follo*ing operational

techni4ues hae been used as e&amples/ obsering images (a)" phantom *iggling (b)" and listening in (c).

3fter an unsuccessful attempt at separating" the practitionerimmediately starts obsering the oid behind the eyes. +f images

begin to appear *ithin : to = seconds" obseration should continue

*ithout scrutini?ing the images in detail" or the image *ill eaporate.

3s a result of this action" the image *ill 4uic!ly become more and

more realistic and colorful" engulfing the practitioner. +f eerything

comes together correctly" a sudden translocation into the picture *ill



occur" or" *hen the picture becomes ery realistic" attempt to separate

from the body. +f nothing happens after : to = seconds" then the

practitioner should transition to the techni4ue of phantom *iggling.

For : to = seconds" the practitioner 4uic!ly searches the entire

body for a part that can be *iggled. Or" the entire period of time isspent in an attempt to *iggle a specific body part/ a finger" hand" or

leg. +f the desired effect occurs" then the practitioner should continue

*ith the techni4ue and achiee the ma&imum possible range of

moement. 9uring this process" a number of things can happen"

including spontaneous separation" a successful separation attempt"

free moement of the *iggled part" or the presence of sound or

ibrations. 3ll of these eents are of great adantage. +f nothing*iggles oer the course of : to = seconds" then the practitioner should

moe on to listening in.

The practitioner should try to detect an internal sound. +f the

sound is there" listen and try to amplify it. 3s a result" the noise may

gro* into a roar and spontaneous separation *ill occur" separatingthrough the use of a techni4ue *ill be possible" or ibrations *ill

occur. +f no noise occurs oer the course of : to = seconds" then the

entire cycle should be repeated. +t is beneficial to e&amine the reason behind the use of a set of

three indirect techni4ues. This is motiated by the fact that the body

often reacts to techni4ues in ery peculiar *ays. 0ith one person" atechni4ue may *or! one day and not *or! on another day" *hich is

*hy if only one techni4ue is used" een a ery good techni4ue that

*or!s often" a practitioner can miss out on a lot of different

e&perience through the lac! of ariety in practice. Thus" a practicalrepertoire should consist of seeral techni4ues.

Interesting Fact!

So$eti$es, the first techni4ue that &or+s for a

practitioner never results in a repeat of phase

entrance again, although other techni4ues that

&ere not i$$ediately effective at the novice stages



of practice later "egin to &or+ regularly and

successfully(

'. :epeating the Cy!le of Indire!t $e!hni%ue&

+f the first cycle of : techni4ues does not yield any clear results"

this does not mean that all is lost. Een if the techni4ues do not *or!"

they still dra* the practitioner closer to the phase state and it is

simply necessary to continue using the techni4ues by again obsering

pictures" phantom *iggling" and listening in I and repeating this

process at least three times.

8aing performed one cycle of techni4ues" one can easily go onto doing a second cycle" a third one" a fourth one" and so on. +t is

4uite probable that during one of these cycles" a techni4ue *ill

suddenly proe itself" een though it had not been *or!ing at all 'ust

a fe* seconds beforehand.

3 serious practitioner should commit to a minimum of < cycles.The problem lies in the fact that it is psychologically difficult to do

something that has sho*n itself not to *or!" and one may gie up

ta!ing further action" een though one could be at the cusp of fallinginto the phase. Deep trying" and then try again" and againH There hae

been cases *here it too! t*enty cycles to produce results. 3

monumental effort" yes" but one *orth the outcome.

). 2alling 6&leep 8ith the Po&&i3ility of $rying 6gain.

+f a practitioner is unable to enter the phase after performing

cycles and attempts to separate" or een if eerything *or!ed out" itis still better to go bac! to sleep to facilitate subse4uent attempts.

3gain" it is ery important to go to sleep *ith a clearly definedintention of actually performing the cycles upon a*a!ening. 6uch

intention astly increases the probability that the ne&t attempt *ill

occur soon. That is" one should not fall asleep *ith an empty head

and the desire to simply get a good nights sleep. +f using the deferred

method" then clear intention is mandatory" as seeral attempts are

possible oer the course of a sleep cycle.



Een if only a fe* attempts are made accompanied by decided and

concentrated effort" then the four steps described in the algorithm *ill

undoubtedly produce entrance into the phase.

+n order to more effectiely use the system of indirect cycles" it isnecessary to discuss *hat to do if one techni4ue *or!s and progress

ceases during the cycle and phase entry does not occur.

First" understand that if a techni4ue has begun to *or!" only lac!

of e&perience and s!ill *ill preent the phase.

6econd" barriers are oercome by temporarily s*itching to other

techni4ues. 2et us suppose that noise arising *hen listening in gro*slouder and louder and then pea!s in olume. +t *ould surely be

beneficial to s*itch to forced falling asleep or obsering images for

seeral seconds" and then return to listening in. The sound may then

become much louder and proide an opportunity to proceed *ith the

techni4ue. 6ometimes" it ma!es sense to brea! off seeral times intoarious techni4ues and then return to the primary techni4ue that

yielded some results.



+t is often possible to simultaneously perform t*o or een three

techni4ues and e&perience no negatie effect to results. +t is also

normal and natural to s!ip around from techni4ue to techni4ue"

deiating from a specific plan of action. For e&ample" sounds often

arise during phantom *iggling. +n this case" a practitioner may 'ustsimply s*itch oer to listening in. Other oft%encountered results

pairings are/ images from sound" sound from rotation" sound from

straining the brain" a strain on the brain from listening in" ibrations

from rotation" ibrations from phantom *iggling" and so forth.

3uring initial atte$pts at using cycles of indirect techni4ues, the

pro"le$ of confusion during a critical $o$ent $ay arise, &hen a

novice practitioner suddenly forgets e#actly &hat to do and ho& todo it( This is nor$al, and the solution is to i$$ediately do &hatever

co$es to $ind( Results can "e achieved in this $anner( 5hen a

practitioner is $ore rela#ed a"out the practice, such pro"le$s &ill

no longer occur(

9I+$S 2:O, $9E ,I+(

;aried cycles of indirect techni4ues is an almost mandatory precondition for getting the best result. There are some e&ceptions.

6ometimes" through indirect indicators" a practitioner may be

inclined to begin *ith certain techni4ues" regardless of *hat had been planned. These are a sort of hint from the body and the ability to use

such cues plays an e&tremely important role in the use of indirect

techni4ues because they enable a practitioner to substantially increase

the effectieness of practice.

9int +o. 1D Image&

+f the practitioner becomes a*are upon a*a!ening that some

images" pictures" or remnants from dreams are before him" then he

should immediately proceed to the techni4ue of obsering images"

*ith all of the results that arise from it. +f this does not lead to

anything" then cycling *ith a set of techni4ues should begin.



9int +o. #D +oi&e&

+f the practitioner reali?es upon a*a!ening that he hears an

internal noise" roaring" ringing" *histling" and so forth" then he

should immediately begin from the techni4ue of listening in. +f this

has no effect" then cycles of indirect techni4ues ought to commence. 9int +o. 'D @i3ration&

+f a practitioner feels ibrations throughout the body *hile

a*a!ening" they should be amplified through the use of straining the

brain or straining the body *ithout using muscles. 0hen the

ibrations reach their pea!" the practitioner can try to separate. +f

nothing happens after seeral attempts" indirect techni4ue cyclesshould start.

9int +o. )D +um3ne&&

+f a practitioner *a!es to numbness in a body part" phantom

*iggling of that part should be attempted. +f no result is achieedafter seeral attempts" cycling should be tried. Of course" it is better

to refrain from techni4ues if the numbness is ery intense and causes

substantial discomfort.

6:ESSIO+ 6+( P6SSI@I$Y

9uring the practice of indirect techni4ues" including techni4ue

cycles" unsuccessful attempts may result in falling asleep or

becoming completely a*a!e. These results indicate a deficiency or

e&cess of aggression. +f a practitioner usually falls asleep *hile attempting to enter the

phase" then more aggressie action is needed *hile performingindirect techni4ues. +f" on the other hand" most attempts end in a full

and alert a*a!ening" then aggression should be curbed and

techni4ues should be conducted more slo*ly and in a more rela&ed

manner. 7alance bet*een passiity and aggression is imperatieJ the

phase state is easily attained by those practitioners *ho find a stable

medium bet*een passiity and aggression.



The issue of aggression re4uires a closer e&amination. =uite

often, atte$pts at indirect techni4ues are $ade leisurely, &ithout

desire or real effort, to >chec+ the$ off the list?( Results $ore easily

reali*ed if the practitioner possesses an aggressive desire to enter the

phase( More often than not, practitioners lac+ aggressive desire,

instead of having too $uch of it( Thus, each effort re4uires a distinct&ant to succeed(

S$:6$EY 2O: 6C$IO+

6ome mista!enly beliee that indirect techni4ues *ill produce

4uic!" easy results" li!e a pill. 9espite the fact that the techni4uesdescribed in this guideboo! are the best means to entering the phase"

strong effort still needs to be e&erted. This is not important for some"

as eerything comes 4uite easily to them" but for others this is of

great importance.

+ndirect techni4ues *ill definitely *or! if practiced consistentlyand as described. +t has already been noted that in the ma'ority of

cases" ma!ing seeral concentrated attempts upon a*a!ening *ithout

moement is sufficient enough to produce results. +t may ta!e a lot oftime and effort to achiee phase entrance" so practitioners *ho set

goals and *or! diligently *ill be presented *ith a cro*n of success.

3ttempts are important in large measure not only for the finalresult" but also for the process itself. 9uring practice" the practitioner

independently learns and soles issues that may not hae been

understood in the guideboo!. Other times" the practitioner *ill

encounter situations that hae neer been described at all. +tsimpossible to prepare a student for eery possible scenario" so as a

practitioner moes deeper into practice" a uni4ue" indiidual perspectie and portfolio of e&periences deelops" *hich *ill

certainly proe useful in the future. ntil then" diligent practice of the

information presented in this boo! *ill ready a practitioner for that

personal frontier.

3ctions in practice re4uire strict attention. 6tudy the techni4ues

and selects those that *or! best. 6et the goal of consistent" conscious



*a!ing *ithout moement. Ma!e an ob'ectie of performing cycles

of indirect techni4ues *hile *a!ing up" day in and day out. 5ith

such a clear course of action, the practitioner should never defocus

his attention or dissipate his energy on other related actions, li+e, for

e#a$ple, on direct techni4ues for entering the phase( +f the indirecttechni4ues do not *or! in the course of seeral days" continue trying.

The latest results occur in a matter of *ee!s" not months or years"

li!e some sources maintain. 5oals are meant to be stubbornly

pursued" step%by%step" firmly" and diligently.

+f no results occur after 1C to -C days" it is better to cease practice

for a *ee! and ta!e a rest" and then return *ith a fresh resole to

master the practice. +nterestingly enough" it is e&actly during such a brea! that spontaneous entrances into the phase through the most

dierse methods occur.

+f success is still elusie een after 1 to - months of trying" then a

thorough analysis of the regimen should be conducted to root out any

obious mista!es or deficiencies. +f oercoming them proes difficultor impossible" s*itching oer to direct techni4ues is not

recommended since they proe much more difficult than indirect

techni4ues. +nstead" techni4ues for entering the phase throughconscious dreaming should be practiced.

+t is also not *orth s!ipping oer problematic areas and trying to

ma!e up for mista!es by e&pending een more effort. For e&ample"ignoring the precondition of a*a!ening *ithout moing *ill proe

fruitless. 7ypassing this re4uirement *or!s for ery fe* people.

Facing eery problem head%on and *or!ing hard to brea! through

*ill be richly re*arded *ith an unforgettable" treasured e&periences.Deep tryingH

$YPIC6< ,IS$6>ES

WI$9 I+(I:EC$ $EC9+I=UES

• +nternal certainty that nothing *ill happen instead of belieing in

positie results.



•6topping the performance of techni4ues after an unsuccessful

cycle *hen a minimum of four cycles should be practiced.

•onstantly a*a!ening to moement instead of remaining still.

•Performing direct techni4ues in the eening. Total concentrationon indirect techni4ues is re4uired from the morning on if a

practitioners goal is access to the phase.

•Performing indirect techni4ues for an e&tremely long period of

time (- minutes or more). This is a complete *aste of time in most

cases.

•6*itching from techni4ues that hae begun to *or! *hen

practice should be follo*ed through to the end.

•Passiely performing techni4ues instead of being determined andaggressie.

•Performing each techni4ue separately for too long a period of

time" een if the techni4ue does not *or!" instead of s*itching to

another techni4ue *ithin seeral seconds.

•E&cessie thin!ing and analysis *hile performing indirect

techni4ues" *hich re4uire mental tran4uility and inner stillness.

•6topping and concentrating on unusual sensations *hen they

arise ersus continuing the techni4ue that brought them about in the

first place.

•E&tremely long anticipation upon a*a!ening instead of

immediately performing techni4ues.

•Premature attempts at separating" instead of performing phase

creation techni4ues through to the end of progress.

•8olding the breath *hen unusual sensations appear. 7e calm

instead.

•Opening the eyes *hen the only recommended moement is

breathing or moing the eyes behind closed lids.

•7eing agitated instead of rela&ed.

•easing attempts to separate een *hen partial success is met.

•6training the physical muscles *hile performing the techni4ues

ersus remaining physically motionless.



• ot practicing after an alert a*a!ening" *hen techni4ues are best

applied % especially in the eent of *a!ing *ithout moement.

•Merely imagining the techni4ues instead of really understanding

them and performing them" if" of course" one is not performingrotation or other imagined techni4ues.

•6imply *iggling phantom limbs instead of employing a fi&ed

determination to increase the range of moement

•Falling right asleep during forced falling asleep" instead of haing

the firm intention of continuing efforts *ithin only = to 1C seconds.

•6crutini?ing the details of images *hen using the techni4ue of

obsering imagesJ the *hole image should be obsered

panoramically lest it disappear.• +ntentionally trying to force pictures *hen obsering images"

instead of loo!ing for *hat is naturally presented.

•6imply hearing noise *hen employing the techni4ue of listening

in" instead of attentiely trying to pay attention" catch something" and

listen in.

Eer!i&e& for Chapter #

=ue&tion&

1. 0hy are indirect techni4ues the easiest

-. 0hy *ill one techni4ue *or! for some people and not forothers

:. 8o* many attempts are necessary in order to enter the phase

<. 0hen obsering images" should a picture be con'ured=. 8o* is phantom *iggling different from imagined

moement

>. 0here does sound come from *hile listening in@. 8o* is forced listening in different from normal listening in

A. 0hen employing the techni4ue of rotation" should one try to

rotate or simply imagine the rotation

B. 0hat is physically strained *hen using the techni4ue ofstraining the brain



1C. 8o* is straining the brain different from straining the body

*ithout using muscles

11. 6hould a practitioner fall asleep *hen using the forced falling

asleep techni4ue

1-. 3ccording to statistics from classes held at the 6chool of Out%of%7ody Trael" *hich indirect techni4ues are the most effectie

1:. 0hy should one practice all of the primary techni4ues in a

rela&ed state

1<. 0hat helps practitioners to enter the phase one%third of the

time *hile using indirect techni4ues

1=. +s leitation the most popular separation techni4ue

1>. 0hat is the essential difference bet*een indirect techni4uesand separation techni4ues

1@. 8o* does the separation techni4ue of rolling out differ from

the indirect techni4ue of rotation

1A. +s it necessary to imagine anything *hile trying to separate

1B. 0hen is the best time to use indirect techni4ues-C. an techni4ues that are traditionally used upon a*a!ening be

attempted during the day 8o* effectie are these techni4ues

during the day-1. +s becoming consciousness *hile dreaming the same as

conscious a*a!ening

--. 0hen employing indirect techni4ues" does an inability toa*a!en *ithout moing hae an effect on oneGs practice

-:. 0hat are the components of the algorithm of cycling indirect

techni4ues

-<. 0hat first step must be ta!en *hile cycling through indirecttechni4ues

-=. 8o* many different techni4ues should a cycle consist of->. 0hat is the minimum number of cycles that must be

practiced

-@. +f a lot of time has passed after a*a!ening" is this good or bad

for cycles of indirect techni4ues

-A. 0hat must be done if a techni4ue gets stuc! at an

unsatisfactory leel of results



-B. +f the cycles do not *or!" *hat should be done

:C. 0hat are hints from the mind

:1. +n *hat cases is it necessary to introduce aggressie effort

*hen performing indirect techni4ues

$a&"&

1. Try all of the primary indirect techni4ues *hile in a rela&ed

state and single out : to = techni4ues that seem to *or!. Repeat

such training another couple of times on other days.

-. Try all of the separation techni4ues in a rela&ed state.

:. 3chiee one conscious a*a!ening follo*ed by cycles ofindirect techni4ues.

<. 3chiee one conscious a*a!ening *ithout any physical

moement and attempt an indirect techni4ue.

=. pon a*a!ening *ithout moing" perform a full cycle of

indirect techni4ues" and repeat this e&ercise until phase entranceis achieed.



Chapter ' – (ire!t $e!hni%ue&

$9E CO+CEP$ O2 (I:EC$ $EC9+I=UES

3irect techni4ues for entering into an out-of-"ody e#perience areused &ithout the prere4uisite of sleep@ "y perfor$ing specific actions

&hile lying do&n &ith the eyes closed( The adantage of direct

techni4ues is that" in theory" they can be performed at any moment.8o*eer" a large dra*bac! e&ists in the length of time it ta!es to

master the techni4ues. Only =CK of practitioners achiee success

after ma!ing daily attempts oer a period of : to > *ee!s. For some"an entire year may pass before results are reali?ed. The difficulty in

achieing results *ith direct techni4ues is not a problem of

inaccessibility" but the natural psychological characteristics of the

indiidual. ot eeryone is able to clearly understand the specific

nuances inoled" *hich is *hy some *ill continually ma!e

mista!es. Many practitioners strie to master direct techni4ues right a*ay

because they appear to be the most conenient" straightfor*ard" and

concrete techni4ues. 8o*eer" it is a grae mista!e to begin

attempting and mastering phase entrance from this leel. +n BCK of

cases *here noices begin their training *ith direct techni4ues"

failure is guaranteed. Moreoer" a ast amount of time" effort" andemotion *ill be *asted. 3s a result" complete disillusionment *ith

the entire sub'ect of phase e&periences is possible.

3irect techni4ues should only "e practiced after $astery of the

easiest indirect techni4ues or ho& to "eco$e conscious &hen

drea$ing( n any case, difficulties &ill not &ear one do&n

after&ards, as it &ill "e e#ceedingly clear fro$ oneAs o&n e#perience

that the phase is not a fig$ent of the i$agination( %lso, an advanced



I+$E+SI$Y O2 6$$E,P$S

The degree of enthusiasm that is deoted to any pursuit is directly

related to successfully reaching a goal. 8o*eer" it is ery importantto !no* *hen to ease up" especially *ith the delicate matter of phase

entry. One attempt per day using a direct techni4ue is sufficient. +f

more attempts are made" the 4uality of each attempt *ill suffer

considerably.

Interesting Fact!

Many approach direct techni4ues as if digging aditch' the $ore - the faster and the "etter( The

result' do*ens of atte$pts that yield no fruit(

3 lot of practitioners beliee that do?ens of attempts oer the

course of a day *ill yield the phase. This is not the path to successand *ill 4uic!ly lead to disillusionment *ith the practice. Een if

after a *ee! or a month no results are seen" direct techni4ues should

be attempted only once daily. Persistent" analytical" and sensible"stubborn resole to practice properly *ill produce the desired effect.

(U:6$IO+ O2 6+ 6$$E,P$

+t is useless to attempt entering the phase using a direct

techni4ue by lying in bed and resoling neither to sleep nor get up

until the phase occurs. 6uch coarseness in handling delicate nature ofthe mind *ill produce nothing besides rapid emotional e&haustion.

Rigid timeframes apply *hile performing direct techni4ues beforea sleep or in the middle of the night. 9irect techni4ues attempts

should only last 1C to -C minutes. 2onger durations inhibit sleepiness

because the mind *ill concentrate too long on the techni4ues" and the

desire to fall asleep *ill dissipate" resulting in insomnia that often

lasts seeral hours. Oerdone efforts negatiely affect natural



enthusiasm due lost sleep and being tired the follo*ing day" *hich is

compounded by the reality of a gro*ing number of failed attempts.

+f direct techni4ues produce no effect oer the course of 1C to -C

minutes before sleep or in the middle of the night" then it is better to

go to sleep *ith the thought that eerything *ill *or! out anothertime. This is the positie outloo! a practitioner ought to al*ays

maintain.

BO(Y POSI$IO+

0ith indirect techni4ues body position isnt important since

conscious a*a!ening regardless of body position is the goal.8o*eer" the position of the body is crucial *hile practicing direct

techni4ues.

There is not an e&act body position that each practitioner should

assume since" once again" indiidual characteristics and instincts

differ *idely. There are specific rules that allo* one to select theright position" based on indirect indicators.

Many hold a belief that the correct pose is that of a corpse I lying

on the bac! *ithout a pillo*" legs and arms straightened. This notionhas probably been borro*ed from other practices claiming that it

helps achiee an altered state of mind. 8o*eer" this position

seriously impairs the efforts of the ma'ority of practitioners. Thecorpse pose should only be used *hen it is probable that a

practitioner *ill 4uic!ly fall asleep *hile performing techni4ues in

this pose" een though it generally preents sleep.

+f a practitioner e&periences difficulty falling asleep and isconstantly a*a!e *hile performing direct techni4ues" then the most

comfortable position for the indiidual should be used.

f sleep co$es 4uite easily to a practitioner, a less natural position should "e ta+en( f a practitioner e#periences fe&er gaps in

consciousness &hen the techni4ues are perfor$ed and has a harder

ti$e falling asleep, a $ore co$forta"le a position should "e used(

9epending on the situation" there are many possible positions/ lying

do*n on the bac!" on the stomach" on the side" or een in a half%



reclined position. +t is possible that a practitioner *ill hae to change

positions from one attempt to another" introducing ad'ustments

related to a free%floating state of mind.

:E<66$IO+

7y nature" one should clearly understand that direct techni4ues

are in and of themseles rela&ation methods" inasmuch as no phase

can occur *ithout one being rela&ed. 3ccordingly" one can go

immediately into the phase *ithout any prior rela&ation.

6ince the most effectie *indo* of time for using direct

techni4ues occurs before sleep and at night" and lasts only 1C to -Cminutes in any case" additional time should not be *asted on trying to

rela&" nor should time for rela&ation be subtracted from the re4uisite

1C to -C minutes.

orrect and 4uality rela&ation is a difficult pursuit and many go

about it indiidually" producing an opposition to natural rela&ation.For e&ample" many endeaor to rela& their bodies to such a degree

that in the end the mind is as actie as it *ould be *hile trying to

sole a difficult mathematical e4uation. +n this type of situation"entering the phase is impossible.

The body automatically rela&es *hen the mind is rela&ed. The

body" in turn" *ill neer rela& if the mind is actie. Therefore" it is better for beginners refrain from the trouble of the nuances of

rela&ation and sae their energies for more elementary matters.

+nstead of forcing a technical rela&ation" a practitioner should

simply lie do*n for seeral minutes and this *ill proide the bestrela&ation. 2ying do*n actiates natural rela&ation processesJ the

most po*erful !ind.omplete" peaceful rela&ation may only be coerced by those *ith

speciali?ed" in%depth e&perience. 5enerally" these are people *ho

hae spent a great amount of time and effort mastering trance and

meditatie states. Rela&ation in these cases should ta!e no more than

1 to : minutes and no longer as because *hen a practitioner is e&pert

at rela&ation it is sufficient to 'ust thin! about it" and it occurs.



3ll 4uality rela&ation techni4ues may *ell sere as direct

techni4ues" if a free%floating state of mind occurs *hile they are

e&ercised. 3fter gaining the necessary e&perience *ith trance and

meditation" a practitioner of these mental arts may proceed to

mastering the phase.

@6:I6$IO+S O2 USI+

(I:EC$ $EC9+I=UES

Techni4ues used to gain direct entrance to the phase are e&actly

the same as those used during indirect attempts. The only difference

is in the method of implementation. The techni4ues are described indetail in hapter -. 8o*eer" since direct techni4ues mostly re4uire

passiity" not all techni4ues *or! e4ually *ell for both direct and

indirect entries into the phase. For e&ample" actie techni4ues li!e

straining the brain cannot be used to gain a smooth entrance into the

phase. 9irect techni4ues differ from indirect techni4ues in their

implementation because of the slo*" halting production of results that

occurs from the beginning of a direct attempt through the end of it. +fupon a*a!ening something happens to *or!" then this can practically

al*ays lead to entrance into the phase. For e&ample" the same

phantom *iggling before sleep can begin 4uic!ly enough" but rangeof moement *ill not be easy to increase" and the entire

implementation of the techni4ue *ill rely on protracted" rhythmic

moement. Results ta!e much longer/ ten minutes instead of ten

seconds. These differences also apply to eery techni4ue described inthis guideboo!.

2i!e the practice of indirect techni4ues" to begin the practice ofdirect techni4ues" a practitioner should choose : or < of the most

suitable techni4ues from those that proe most effectie to the

indiidual. +n order to assist the practitioner" a table has been

proided" detailing the documented effectieness of the direct

techni4ues/



The primary difference in *or!ing *ith direct techni4ues is the

time that it ta!es to e&ercise each. +f testing a specific indirect

techni4ue ta!es only : to = seconds" then in this case seeral minutes

*ill be spent. 9uration aries depending on certain factors.

There are three primary *ays of performing the techni4ues/classical" se4uencing" and cycling % similar to the cycling used *ith

indirect techni4ues. To understand *hich ariant should be used"

consider the follo*ing table/

@ariation& of U&ing the

$e!hni%ue&

When to U&e It

:lassical passive) variation'

One attempt of 1 techni4ue.The techni4ue may be alternatedafter each attempt.

% *hen learning direct

techni4uesJ% *hen a practitioner generally

sleeps poorlyJ

% if attempts lead to *a!ing upJ

% if attempts *ith other

ariations occur *ithout lapses in

consciousnessJ

% if the body and consciousnessare in a rela&ed stateJ

$he ,o&t Effe!ti?e (ire!t $e!hni%ue& at Seminar& of the S!hool

of Out-of-Body $ra?el

Phantom 0iggling 1=KRotation 1=K

2istening in 1=K

;ibrations (occurring amid the use of other

techni4ues)

1=K

Obsering +mages 1CK

Mi&ture of Techni4ues 1CK

6imple separation (usually mi&ed in *ith other

techni4ues)

1CK

Other Techni4ues 1CK



Se4uencing $iddle)'One attempt *ith - to :

techni4ues for 1 to = minutes.

Techni4ues are alternated

infre4uently. 3ggression

fluctuates *ith the length of time

that the techni4ues are performed.

% used if falling asleep occurs*hile using the classical

ariation" or if cycling results in

becoming *ide a*a!eJ

% *hen a practitioner generally

falls asleep 4uic!lyJ

:ycling active)'

3lgorithm of cycling :techni4ues li!e *ith indirect

entry to the phase" but performing each techni4ue for 1C

seconds to 1 minute" and not : to

= seconds.

% if the classical and se4uencing

ariations put one asleepJ% *hen one generally falls

asleep ery 4uic!lyJ% can also be employed *hen

e&hausted or sleep depriedJ

3 practitioner should al*ays begin *ith the classical ariation" i.e.

using one techni4ue oer an entire attempt. 9ue to the unusual natureof the efforts inoled" a beginners enthusiasm may sustain a

completely alert state. 2ater" ho*eer" strong" prolonged lapses of

consciousness into sleep may occur. 8ere" it may be necessary to

increase the leel of actiity by transitioning to the se4uencing

ariation.

6e4uencing is the primary ariation used for direct techni4ues because of its elasticity in application. +t can be passie if oer the

course of 1= minutes *hen a practitioner alternates t*o techni4ues

for fie minutes. +t may also be aggressie if used se4uencing threetechni4ues for one minute. Eerything bet*een these t*o e&tremes

allo*s proper practice of the techni4ues and selection of the best

ariation to achiee a free%floating state of mind. +f falling off to sleep stubbornly occurs een *ith the actie form

of se4uencing" then one should start cycling through indirect

techni4ues" but performing each techni4ue from 1C seconds to 1

minute.



3s long *or! *ith the techni4ues is implied" one should not torment

oneself if one does not *ant to do something" other*ise one may

4uic!ly tire out. Eerything should be a pleasure to do and not cause

any e&cessie emotional tension.

$9E 2:EE-2<O6$I+ S$6$E O2 ,I+(

There are almost infinite descriptions of direct entry techni4ues

offered in literature" stories" on the +nternet" and at seminars.

6ometimes" one description fundamentally differs from another. +n

the ma'ority of cases" ho*eer" common threads e&ist that unite

almost eery description of a particular techni4ue/ short lapses inconsciousness" memory gaps" and drifting in and out of sleep" all of

*hich are hallmar!s of the free%floating state of mind. 3fter any of

these phenomena occur" all manner of unusual pre%phase or phase

sensations arise.

2apses in consciousness may last for seconds" seeral minutes" ormore than an hour. They may range from a simple loss of

consciousness to entrance into a full%fledged dream. They may be

singular and rare" or may occur seeral times oer the course of aminute. 0hateer a lapse entails" the mind attains a mode of

operating that is ideal for phase e&perimentation" proided the

practitioner is able to refrain from deep sleep and 4uic!ly return to aconscious" *a!ing state.

ot eery lapse of consciousness leads to the phase. The lapse

must hae sufficient depth to be effectie. Thus" *ith eery

unsuccessful lapse" another deeper lapse should be incurred.



the moment consciousness tapers off" a*a!ening *ill immediately

occur.

On the other hand" if lapses do not occur" and are replaced by

complete alertness" the follo*ing tric!s of the trade may help/ full

concentration on mental actions or" conersely" musing anddaydreaming in parallel *ith the techni4ue being used. +t should be

noted that these are only effectie at the initial stages of *or!ing *ith

direct techni4ues since such techni4ues hae a strong sleep%inducing

effect.

+f direct techni4ues do not lead to light sleep or singular lapses

after a long period of regular practice" then it must be assumed that

the practitioner is dealing *ith some appreciable error in techni4ue orin the length of performance.

Regulating the number of lapses that occur may be modified by

body position during practice or by changing the ariation used *hile

performing techni4ues.

Entering the phase *ith a free%floating state of mind most oftenoccurs as the result of three !ey factors. First" one techni4ue or

another may begin to *or! *ell during a lapse. 6econd" nearness to

the phase may une&pectedly manifest itself through sounds oribration after a lapse. 9uring this" transitioning to techni4ues that

correspond to the aboe symptoms (listening in" straining the brain)

may be applied. Third" *hen e&iting a lapse" it is sometimes easy toseparate or 4uic!ly find a *or!ing techni4ue by paying attention to

initial indicators.

2apses in consciousness are not bound to occur in 1CCK of cases.

8o*eer" striing to achiee lapses plays a ery important role sincethey are not al*ays perceiable" and a lapse occurrence is not al*ays

obious. They can be ery short in duration or shallo*. Or" they maynot occur at all. onetheless" properly applied techni4ues to produce

lapses may gie entrance to the phase.

6UI<I6:Y 26C$O:S



sing direct techni4ues in the eening or in the middle of the

night ta!e adantage of the bodys natural state of fatigue and for

practical purposes this natural tiredness may be amplified. For

e&ample" direct techni4ues more easily lead to success if the

practitioner is considerably sleep%depried. Moreoer" in such a state"inducing a free%floating state of mind may be forgone. The most

important thing is simply not to fall asleep immediately" in addition

to employing the appropriate ariations *ith the techni4ues. 0illful

depriation of sleep is torturous and useless een though great results

may be achieed by an e&perienced and !no*ledgeable practitioner

in a seerely fatigued state. 7eginners are better off approaching all

forms of practice in a natural" balanced *ay. 3n intense longing sleep is not limited to long periods of sleep

depriationJ physical and emotional fatigues also play important

roles. +n that case" the most important thing is not to fall asleep *hen

performing the techni4ues" and thus one must select a more actie

techni4ue ariation than usual.

S$:6$EY 2O: 6C$IO+

9irect techni4ues seldom produce 4uic! and clear results" unli!e

entering the phase ia becoming conscious *hile dreaming or

through the use of indirect techni4ues. 3t first" direct techni4ues produce sporadic results" *hich is *hy the path of practice should not

begin *ith direct techni4ues hoping for fast results. +t is better to

systematically practice a techni4ue" *or!ing to*ard mastery on a

consistent basis. There is no cause for *orry if results are achieed after a month

of daily attempts. 3 continual effort to analy?e practice and improeshould be the primary focus because failures are al*ays caused by

distinguishable mista!es.

3lthough difficulties may arise *ith direct techni4ues" one should

neer abandon *hat *or!ed until then (i.e. indirect techni4ues)" as

this could temporarily deprie one of the e&perience that one has

gained so far.



3 combination of direct and indirect techni4ues should neer be

used during the course of a single day since this *ould be detrimental

to practical focus and enthusiasm. +t is better to separately perform

each type of techni4ue on different days. For e&ample" direct

techni4ues could be used before falling asleep during the *or!*ee!*hile indirect techni4ues may be practiced during the *ee!ends

*hen a practitioner has more chances to e&periment using the e&tra

opportunities to sleep.

$YPIC6< ,IS$6>ES

WI$9 (I:EC$ $EC9+I=UES

•3ssuming an incorrect position *hen lying do*n.

•Performing direct techni4ues during the day *hen a practitioner

is ine&perienced" instead of in the eening or at nightJ

•Performing more than one attempt per day.

•Performing protracted rela&ation before the techni4ues" een

*hen this may play a negatie role.

•Performing the techni4ues for too long *hen they should bee&ercised for no more than -C minutes.

•Forgetting to affirm a strong intention of a*a!ening during a

lapse of consciousness.

•2ac! of a free%floating state of mind. This is mandatory

•Falling asleep during lapses in a free%floating state of mind"

instead of *or!ing to*ard multiple lapses *hile a*a!ening.

•Forgetting separation techni4ues and a*aiting some un!no*n

eent upon emergence from a lapse" instead of ta!ing adantage ofthe moment.

•E&cessiely alternating the techni4ues in a primary repertoire"

instead of testing them in a planned and systematic manner.

•8olding the breath *hen unusual sensations are encountered.

3l*ays be calm.

•8alting practice *hen unusual sensations occur *hen it is

necessary to continue *hat brought about the sensations.•E&cessie e&citement *hile performing direct techni4ues.



1=. 0hat happens to consciousness *hile in a free%floating state

during direct techni4ues

1>. 6hould a*a!ening be attempted if falling asleep occurred

*hile using direct techni4ues

1@. 0hat is the probability of entering the phase *ithout a free%floating state of consciousness

1A. 0hat do unsuccessful attempts using direct techni4ues most

often end in

1B. +s se&ual actiity before an eening attempt using direct

techni4ue beneficial

$a&"&

1. hoose the best body position for direct techni4ues based on

your indiidual preferences.

-. se the classical ariation of performing direct techni4ues

until it phase entrance" or falling asleep seeral times.:. sing a combination of ariations for direct techni4ues"

achiee a free%floating state of mind.

<. 0hen performing direct techni4ues" try to achiee no lessthan three lapses in consciousness before -C minutes elapse" or

before you fall asleep. Repeat this challenge until phase entrance

is achieed.



Chapter ) – Be!oming Con&!iou& While (reaming

$9E CO+CEP$ O2 $EC9+I=UES I+@O<@I+

BECO,I+ CO+SCIOUS W9I<E (:E6,I+

The techni4ues for phase entrance ia becoming conscious *hile

dreaming are based on reaching consciousness and self%a*arenessduring a dream" *hich" regardless of dream 4uality" can be

transitioned into a fully reali?ed phase e&perience. ontrary to

popular opinion" haing an out%of%body e&perience through dreamingdiffers little from other techni4uesJ the primary results of *hich may

be persistently categori?ed as dissociatie e&periences/ being fully

conscious *hile remoed from the perception of a physical body.

The realism of a phase induced through becoming conscious in a

dream does not differ from phases entered using other techni4ues"

and" *hen deepened" the phase offers more iid and lucide&periences than those of eeryday life.

+f a practitioner becomes a*are of a dream *hile in it (usually

accompanied by a clear reali?ation that it is" #'ust a dream$)" then the

phase is e&perienced from that moment for*ard.

7eginners often confuse the notion of becoming conscious *hile

dreaming *ith induced dreaming. 3n induced dream is the dream ofa specific topic" proo!ed on demandJ this does not presuppose

consciousness. Moreoer" not all practitioners clearly understand

*hat it means to be fully conscious *hile dreaming. onsciousness

*hile dreaming is al*ays present to some e&tent" but it is necessary

to be as conscious as one *ould be in a *a!eful state. 3*areness is

not possible as long as the plot of the dream continues. 0hen fullunderstanding occurs that eerything around is 'ust a dream" a person

drops the dream and starts doing only *hat he *ants to do at that



ery moment. 3nd after a*a!ening" he should not thin! that *hat

happened *as absurd or une&plainable.

9uring the process of becoming conscious in a dream" a

practitioners actions must be completely subordinated to the desire

to e&perience a 4uality phase. This is *hy" upon becoming consciousin a dream" proceeding to techni4ues related to deepening and

maintaining is crucial.

Techni4ues for becoming conscious in a dream differ ery much

in nature from other techni4ues" and there are good reasons *hy

these methods are differentiated from other practices" li!e so%called

astral proection or out-of-"ody e#perience OB). 8o*eer" their

characteristics differ ery little in terms of results. The techni4ue%related peculiarities rest in the fact that specific

actions are not re4uired to produce immediate" concrete results. 3ll

techni4ue%related elements are performed outside of *hen

consciousness *hile dreaming occurs. This is because it is impossible

to ta!e some action if you are not conscious and do not reali?e thatyou are dreaming. 3ll efforts are directed at ma!ing that ery

reali?ation someho* occur.

Interesting Fact!

ven if a practitioner pays no heed to the

techni4ues for "eco$ing conscious &hile drea$ing,

"ut applies direct or indirect techni4ues, onaverage each fifth phase &ill still occur through

"eco$ing conscious in a drea$( This has "een

statistically proven at se$inars of the School ofOut-of-Body Travel(

Many strie to achiee consciousness during each dream oer the

course of an entire nightJ ho*eer" this is rarely possible due to

physiological barriers. There is a good reason that sleep and dreams

are an important part of a human life. There is an important need to

s*itch off not only body" but also consciousness" so that it may



unconsciously sift and process the ast olume of information

obtained in eeryday life.

The timeframe for achieing conscious dreaming is ery difficult

to estimate due to the nature of re4uired actions. +ntensity and

intention definitely e&ert heay influence. 3 practitioner may becomeconscious in a dream *hen first lapsing into sleep" regardless of

*hen it occurs. Or" *ith regular attempts" this could happen in t*o

*ee!s to a month. eertheless" these techni4ues promise a much

higher li!elihood of success than direct methods" and can be

compared *ith indirect techni4ues % inferior to the latter only in terms

of the speed at *hich results are achieed and the amount of effort

re4uired. 0hile indirect techni4ues yield ma&imum results in light ofa full nights rest" the amount of time spent in bed is not a significant

factor to achieing dream consciousness. Therefore" this techni4ue is

sure to guarantee entry into the phase" especially if difficulty has

been encountered *hile practicing other techni4ues.

Techni4ues used to attain dream consciousness should not becombined *ith other types of techni4ues. +t is better to focus on one

thing at a time. nterestingly, &hen a techni4ue is practiced on a

regular "asis, there is nearly a 17 guarantee that drea$consciousness &ill spontaneously occur( % practitioner $ust +no&

ho& to react &hen this happens(

$EC9+I=UES 2O: BECO,I+

CO+SCIOUS I+ 6 (:E6,

+t is possible to simultaneously practice seeral techni4ues for becoming conscious in a dream since eery techni4ue is directly

compatible and complementary to another.

:emem3ering (ream&

There is a *ell !no*n and *idespread of fallacy that supposes

that dreams do not occur for some people. Eeryone dreams" but not

eeryone remembers their dreams. Een those *ho actiely dream

remember only a small fraction of these nightly e&cursions. 8ence"



one should not thin! that it is impossible for someone *ho does not

remember dreams to become conscious in one. 6uch a person should

simply try to use the techni4ues.

3t the same time" there is a direct correlation bet*een the number

of dreams remembered and the probability of becoming conscious*hile dreaming. That is *hy deeloping the ability to remember

dreams is crucial. +n essence" the ability to achiee dream

consciousness rests *ith the conscious mind" *hich is ery much

interconnected *ith memory%related processes.

onsciousness is naturally inherent in dreams" but it lac!s rapid"

operatie memory. 9reamers may !no* *ho they are" their names"

ho* to *al!" and ho* to tal!" but may not !no* ho* surroundingeents are related" or the nature of their significance.

7y increasing the fre4uency of remembered dreams" short%term

dream memory becomes more deeloped" *hich enables more

realistic dream e&periences follo*ed by a higher probability of dream

consciousness. There are three techni4ues dedicated to increasing the number of

remembered dreams.

The first is to simply recall the details of dreams upon a*a!ening.0ithin the first fe* minutes of *a!ing up" try to remember as many

dreams from the night before as possible. This should be done *ith a

great amount of attention and diligence because this e&ercisestrengthens the memory. +f possible" during the day" or" better yet"

before going to sleep at night" recalling the preious nights dreams

once again is highly beneficial.

0riting dreams do*n in a special dream 'ournal is much moreeffectie than simple recall. Record dreams in the morning *hile

memories are still fresh. The more details recalled *hen recordingthe dream" the better the ultimate results. This is a ery attentie

approach that demands a higher a*areness than simple recollection.

0riting dreams in a 'ournal significantly increases a*areness of

actions and aspirations.

3nother *ay of remembering dreams is to create a map of the

dream *orld. This is called drea$ cartography and is similar to



Creating an 6n!hor

6ince dream consciousness is not lin!ed to specific actions that

ta!e place *ithin a dream and sensory perception continues to

operate in the dream state" it is possible to deelop and use an

artificially conditioned refle& to achiee consciousness. The essenceof this techni4ue is to train the consciousness to uniformly react to

certain stimuli that occur *hile being a*a!e and *hen dreaming"

establishing a habit of specific response eery time a certain situation

occurs.

For e&ample" *hile a*a!e" a practitioner may as!" #3m +

dreaming$ eery time they see an anchor . 3n anchor is any ob'ect

that is often encountered *hile a*a!e and *hile dreaming. E&amplesof anchors include a practitioners o*n hands" red ob'ects" or running

*ater. 0hen first using this techni4ue" a practitioner *ill be unable to

4uestion *hether a dream is in progress eery time a pre%established

anchor is encountered. 8o*eer" *ith training and a strong desire

this techni4ue 4uic!ly produces results. Oer time" subconscious4uestioning of the practitioners state becomes habit" happening

*hile a*a!e and dreaming. The end result is dream consciousness.

+t is important to note that one needs not only to simply as! this4uestion" but that it is also important to ans*er it mindfully" trying to

isolate oneself from surrounding eents in order to be able to ans*er

it in an as ob'ectie and unpredetermined *ay as possible. Failing toans*er ob'ectiely *ill al*ays result in a negatie response (no)" and

dream consciousness *ill not be achieed.

+atural 6n!hor& +n addition to creating deliberate anchors that induce conscious

dreaming" natural anchors should be gien focused attention. Theseare ob'ects and actions that regularly cause dream consciousness"

een *hen consciousness is not desired. 7eing a*are of the e&istence

of natural anchors actually doubles the chances of their appearance.

The follo*ing e&periences are common natural anchors that are

present in dreams/ death" sharp pain" intense fear" stress" flying"

electric shoc!" se&ual sensations" and dreaming about phase entrance



or the phase enironment. 0hen attempting dream consciousness"

identifying natural anchors produces results nearly 1CCK of the time.

One may try to start flying each time that one ans*ers the

4uestion. This is of course pointless *hen in *a!ing reality.

8o*eer" *hen dreaming" this *ill most li!ely lead to flight andonce again proe that eerything around is 'ust a dream.

Self-6naly&i&

onsistent analysis of dreams helps to ascertain reasons for an

absence of conscious a*areness/ these analyses are significant to

attaining dream consciousness. Oer the course of a lifetime" the

mind gro*s accustomed to the parado&ical nature of dreams and paysless attention to them. This becomes apparent *hile trying to

understand that a red crocodile is unable to tal!" cannot be red" nor

can it rent an apartment. 0hile dreaming" these impossibilities are

neer called into 4uestion. The essence of self%analysis is

remembering dreams and thin!ing hard about *hy their parado&icalfeatures had not been ade4uately recogni?ed in the dream state.

0ith e&perience" the eeryday analysis of the correspondence of

dreams to reality begins to hae an effect on a practitionersreasoning *ithin the dream state. For e&ample" that red crocodiles

presence in a rented apartment could cause doubts that gie pause for

reflection" *hich could in turn lead to the understanding thateerything happening is 'ust a dream.

6C$IO+S $O BE (O+E W9E+ BECO,I+

CO+SCIOUS W9I<E (:E6,I+

To ensure that dream consciousness leads to a fully deeloped phase e&perience" one of three specific actions must be ta!en.

The best is the techni4ue is deepening" *hich should be

immediately applied once dream consciousness occurs. 9eepening

must be performed *ithin the dream episode before all other

techni4ues. 9oing so irtually guarantees entrance to the phase. The



choice of actions that follo* deepening is dependent upon a

practitioners predetermined course of plan in the phase.

0hen becoming conscious *hile dreaming" it is 4uite dangerous

to try to return to ones body in order to roll out of it right a*ay

unless one has deepened beforehand. This could result in a situation*here" after haing easily returned to ones body" one *ould not be

able to separate from it" as the phase becomes significantly *ea!er

*hen physical sensations coincide *ith the position of a real body. +f

one is to employ such an option" then in order to return to ones body

one should simply thin! about it" *hich is often sufficient to ma!e

the transition occur almost immediately.

3nother option is the use of translocation techni4ues to arrie at adesired place *ithin the phase *orld. +t is also dangerous to employ

this ariation *ithout first deepeningJ translocating in a shallo*

phase ma!es a return to the *a!eful state ery li!ely. Translocation is

often accompanied by a substantial decrease in the depth of the phase

state.

S$:6$EY 2O: 6C$IO+

To achiee dream consciousness" constant practice is highly

necessary because sporadic practice *ill fail to deelop the re4uisite

bac!ground thought processes. 3s a rule" employing phase entry techni4ues *ithin the conte&t of

dream consciousness produces results after seeral *ee!s" and the

effects of the techni4ues are increasingly pronounced *ith time. +f

there are no results *ithin a month or t*o" refrain from thesetechni4ues for a period of time" ta!e a brea! for a *ee! or t*o" and

resole to assume a fresh start later. Practitioners often stop using these techni4ues after initial results

as later effects become elusie and the fre4uency of dream

consciousness rapidly declines. These techni4ues should not be

abandoned after first yielding results" though a gradual decrease in

practice is generally acceptable.



$YPIC6< ,IS$6>ES W9E+ P:6C$ICI+

BECO,I+ CO+SCIOUS W9I<E (:E6,I+

•

Perceiing the state of dream consciousness as a non%phase stateeen though this phenomenon is one and the same *ith the phase.

•3ttempting dream consciousness *hile performing other phase

entrance techni4ues *hen it is better to focus on dream consciousnessalone.

•0hen falling asleep" lac!ing sufficient desire to e&perience

conscious dreaming een though this is critical.

•ontinuing to yield to the plot of a dream een after achieing

dream consciousness" *hereas subse4uent actions must beindependent and based on free *ill.

• +ncorrectly ans*ering the 4uestion #3m + dreaming$ *hile

dreaming.

•Forgetting to immediately begin deepening techni4ues *hen

dream consciousness has been achieed.

•0hen e&ercising memory deelopment" recalling the most iid

dreams instead of eery dream.• +nconsistent concentration *hile practicing dream consciousness

techni4ues.

Eer!i&e& for Chapter )

=ue&tion&

1. 0hat is the difference bet*een an out%of%body e&perience and

dream consciousness-. 3fter attaining dream consciousness" does the realistic 4uality

of the surroundings differ from that of *a!efulness

:. 0hich techni4ue can be used in a dream to become conscious

in it

<. +s it possible to achiee dream consciousness after the first

attempt=. +s it true that not all people dream



>. 0hy is learning to remember as many dreams as possible

important for becoming conscious *hile dreaming

@. 0hat is dream cartography

A. To e&perience dream consciousness" *hat must be done *hile

falling asleepB. ould a tape measure become an anchor used to achiee

dream consciousness

1C. 0hat e&periences in dreams often spontaneously gie rise to a

state of conscious a*areness

11. 0hat must immediately be done after becoming conscious

*hile dreaming

$a&"&

1. Eery day" immediately before going to sleep" cultiate a

strong desire to become conscious in future dreams.

-. 0hen you *a!e up" recall or *rite do*n the episodes and plots of your dreams eery day.

:. Try to achiee at least one instance of dream consciousness.



Chapter * – +on-autonomou& ,ethod&

$9E ESSE+CE O2 +O+-6U$O+O,OUS ,E$9O(S

2O: E+$E:I+ $9E P96SE

/on-autono$ous $ethods of entering the phase are various types

of e#ternal influences that are a"le to help put a practitioner into the phase state( omputer programs" deices" arious physical actions"

the aid of a helper" or een chemical substances are e&amples of non%

autonomous methods. +n certain cases" these methods actually help*hile some hinder the possibility of a genuine phase e&perience.

eer count on a magical substance or machine to automatically

eliminate the difficulties associated *ith phase entrance. +f such a

substance e&isted" the *hole topic of phase e&perimentation *ould

e&ist at an adanced leel of deelopment and prealence in society.

+n actuality" there are no deices or methods able to consistently proide access to the phase state. 3t best" these e&ist in a largely

supplementary capacity" and the more a practitioner is able to do on

his or her o*n" the more helpful and effectie these supplements are.

+f phase entry has not been mastered autonomously" then results

through the use of supplements *ill be totally accidental.

The reason behind the *ea! effectieness of non%autonomousmethods of phase entrance rests in the fact that the physiological

process responsible for the phase e&perience cannot be e&actly

defined. Only generalities are !no*n" nothing else. +n order to gain a

clear understanding of the state" the processes that gie rise to it must

be discerned and analy?ed. 3ll e&isting technologies hae either

blundered do*n a clearly mista!en path (synchroni?ing thehemispheres of the brain)" or traelled to*ard the detection and use

of indirect indicators (cueing technologies).



CUEI+ $EC9+O<OIES

Of all non%autonomous assistance methods" cueing technologies

yield the best results. The operating principle behind cueing

technologies is 4uite simple/ a deice detects rapid eye moement(REM) and sends signals to a sleeping practitioner" prompting dream

consciousness or an a*a!ening that may be follo*ed by indirect

techni4ues. ueing programs or deices may also send indicators

oer specific interals of timeJ these are receied during REM sleep

and are meant to cause a sleeping practitioner to a*a!en and attempt

indirect techni4ues.

More sophisticated REM%detecting technologies may be purchased at speciali?ed stores or through online merchandisers.

REM%detecting technologies *or! by irtue of special night mas!

e4uipped *ith a motion sensor that detects the fre4uency of specific

eye moements that occur during REM sleep. 0hen the eye

moements reach REM 4uality" the deice sends discreet signals tothe practitioner through light" sound" ibrations" or a combination of

these. +n turn" the practitioner must discern the signal and react to it

*hile sleeping *ith the goal of phase entry through dreamconsciousness.

The effectieness of REM%detecting deices is more plausible in

theory than in practice. The mind 4uic!ly deelops a tolerance forthese types of e&ternal stimuli and stops reacting" and" as a result"

such technologies are hardly used more than one or t*o nights per

*ee!. 6econdly" a practitioner *ill detect only a small portion of the

signals" and conscious reaction occurs in een smaller instances.ueing technologies are best used to send signals that allo* a

practitioner to a*a!en *ithout moing during REM sleep" *hichfacilitates a high probability of phase entrance through indirect

techni4ues.

Pricing of these #mind%machines$ (the common moni!er of any

deice that purports to produce altered consciousness) *idely aries

and is determined by 4uality of REM detection and signaling.

3ailable models include/ 9ream6tal!er" 9reamMa!er



(oa9reamer)" REM%9reamer" 3stral atapult" among many

others. 6ince the use of these deices does not guarantee increased

success in practice" inesting money in the technology is not

recommended. +f a practitioner is curious about cueing technologies"

similar deices may be constructed at home using a special computer program and a run%of%the%mill optical mouse. 9esigns for a

homegro*n setup are easily located on the +nternet.

3nother do%it%yourself *ay of e&perimenting *ith cueing is

through the use of a computer" a music player" or een the alarm

cloc! function on a mobile phone. The practitioner saes short

sounds or phrases" played as an alarm eery 1= to :C minutes *hile

sleeping. These sounds *ill signal the practitioner to *a!e up andattempt indirect techni4ues.

+f the practitioner decides to use cueing technology" seeral

fundamental principles should be considered as results *ill be less

li!ely if they are ignored. First" mind%machines should be used no

more than t*ice a *ee!. Other*ise" too high a tolerance *ill be builtup" rendering the machines ineffectie. 6econd" use cueing

technology in combination *ith the deferred method" *hich *as

coered in the section on indirect techni4ues. +t is better to sleep forsi& hours *ithout distraction and then" after sleep has been

interrupted" put on a sleep%mas! or earpiece and continue sleeping.

6leep *ill be light for the remaining t*o to four hours as there *ill be more REM sleep" ma!ing it easier for the mind to detect cueing

signals. Finally" master indirect techni4ues before ma!ing use of

cueing technologies to attain dream consciousness and subse4uent

phase entrance.

WO:>I+ I+ P6I:S

0or!ing in pairs is considered the second most effectie non%

autonomous methods of entering the phase. One practitioner is to be

the actie one" and the other fills the role of helper. The actie one

practitioner attempts to enter the phase *hile the helper proides

arious types of support to this end.



For e&ample" the actie practitioner lies do*n in bed *hile the

helper stays nearby" *aiting for the actie one to fall asleep. 0hen

sleep occurs" the helper obseres the eyes of the actie" *atching for

the signs of REM sleep" *hich is mainly characteri?ed by 4uic! eye

moements. 0hen REM is apparent" the helper *hispers to thesleeper" communicating that eerything the practitioner is

e&periencing is a dream. The helper may ary the olume of the

*hisper" use touch to strengthen the signal" or shine a flashlight on

the sleepers eyelids I *hich is ery effectie.

The actie practitioner should detect the signals *ithout *a!ing

and indicate a state of conscious a*areness by performing 4uic!"

cyclical eye moements. +f no such indication is gien" the helpercontinues to rouse the actie practitioner" *ho may finally *a!e.

+f the actie practitioner is unable to stay in the dream" indirect

techni4ues should be performed. The actie practitioner should under

no circumstances moe upon a*a!ening or *aste aluable seconds

before transitioning to indirect attempts. +f phase entrance does notoccur after e&ercising the techni4ues" the practitioner should again

fall asleep *ith the intention of ma!ing another attempt.

5enerally" seeral such attempts are enough to glean results.0or!ing in pairs is best performed 'ust prior to a daytime nap" or

*ith the same deferred method used for indirect techni4ues % an

early%morning interruption of a practitioners nighttime sleep.

$EC9+O<OIES 2O: I+(UCI+ $9E P96SE

The ambition to create a deice facilitates 4uic! and easy phaseentrance has led to the appearance of assorted technologies that claim

to fulfill such a role. 3s already stated" none of these deices has been proen effectie.

The most famous of these is the 8emi%6ync system" *hich

purports to synchroni?e the t*o hemispheres of the brain. 8emi%6ync

*as deeloped by Robert Monroe" an 3merican esotericism e&pert

researcher. The idea behind 8emi%6ync is that out%of%body sensations

may be induced by achieing synchroni?ation of the brains t*o



hemispheres. 8o*eer" this type of approach yields a parado& for the

lac! of scientific (or pseudo%scientific) eidence that hemispheric

synchroni?ation influences sensory perception. 3ctually" it is the

cerebral corte& and constituents that are primarily responsible for

sensory perception. 3t the beginning of the -Cth century" it becameclear that the !ey roles in sensory processes are played by arying

leels of inhibition and actiity in the cerebral corte&" and almost not

else*here.

The !ey to soling the problem of technologically induced phase

entrance rests in the inhibition processes of the cerebral corte&.

6ynchroni?ation deices hae no effect on the operation of the

cerebral corte&. The idea of using sounds of arious fre4uencies toinduce a specific leel of electrical actiity in the brain is" so far"

considered impossible. Thus" the sounds and noises used to assist

separation from the body cannot directly affect the process" but

merely sere as cueing signals. 6uch a system *or!s only after

haing been used for a long time" if it *or!s at all. Moreoer" itmight only *or! once or t*ice. eertheless" synchroni?ation

systems are able to help practitioners reach a free floating state of

consciousness since the systems preent sleep or induce *a!efulness" proiding fertile ground for direct phase entry. 8o*eer" the systems

hae nothing at all to do *ith synchroni?ing the t*o hemispheres of

the brain. The idea of inducing arious phase states through sound has

gained *ide attention. Many other programs and technologies hae

appeared as a result" including" for e&ample" the 7rain 0ae

5enerator (705)" *hich allo*s the practitioner to independentlye&periment *ith a *ide array of sounds and fre4uencies and arious

methods of transmission. The effect is the same/ cueing during sleepor the maintenance of a transitional state. Thus" there is no noticeable

difference bet*een using machines and listening to similar sounds or

musical compositions.

+nasmuch as the deices described aboe hae not deliered

notable result" the search for ne* technologies continues unhindered.

The number of ideas to e&ert noninasie influence oer the brain



and its constituent parts is increasing. For e&ample" there is a theory

that phase e&periences may be induced by electromagnetically

stimulating the left angular gyrus. 8o*eer" this" li!e all other non%

autonomous methods" is strictly based on theory. 3t present"

consistent" focused" unassisted practice is the simplest and onlyguaranteed means to achieing phase entrance.

9YP+OSIS 6+( SUES$IO+

8ypnosis is a little%studied method of entering the phase. The idea

is that a hypnotist is able to cause a person to enter the phase through

suggestion or affirmation. There is no doubt that hypnosis is aninteresting concept" especially for persons *ho easily yield to po*er

of suggestion" but such indiiduals account for only 1K of the

population.

9ue to specific characteristics of human perception" the chances

are nil that hypnosis is a li!ely conduit to phase entrance. 6o" it seemsunli!ely that hypnotic techni4ues *ill become *ell%!no*n" or that a

top%notch hypnotist *ould" through suggestion" easily be able to lead

a sub'ect directly into the phase.8o*eer" it is completely feasible that hypnotic suggestion may

promote higher fre4uency in dream consciousness or a*a!ening

*ithout moing (and remembering to do indirect techni4ues). 8ereagain" this method is only a facilitator" *hile actual phase entrance

depends on the efforts of the practitioner.

P9YSIO<OIC6< SI+6<S

The simplest *ay to supplement the practice is establishing areminder that prompts conscious a*a!ening and subse4uent indirect

techni4ues. This may be accomplished by blindfolding the eyes or

tying a cord taut around an arm or leg. The idea is that the reminder

is immediately felt *hen the practitioner *a!es" prompting the

attempt of indirect techni4ues. +n actuality" mind%machines *or!



using the same principle since these are most effectie as cues that

arouse an intention to perform a specific action.

3 more sophisticated e&ample of a reminder is *hen a

practitioner do?es off in a position meant to cause numbness to a

certain body part. 0hile a*a!ening" the practitioner *ill ta!e the physical numbness a cue to practice indirect techni4ues. 3 secondary

benefit to this method of physiological signaling is that the numb

body part may easily be used to perform phantom *iggling. Falling

asleep *hile lying on the bac! *ith an arm behind the head" or by

lying directly on an arm are effectie e&amples. These and other

postures *ill impede circulation" cause numbness" and promote

a*a!ening. aturally" the numbness should not be e&cessie. 9ierse e&periments that e&ploit physiological needs are

especially popular for inducing conscious a*a!ening or becoming

conscious *hile dreaming. For e&ample" a practitioner may forgo

*ater oer the course of the day before attempting to enter the phase.

The effect is an acute thirst *hile dreaming" *hich may be used tocommunicate that the dream state has ta!en oer. Or" thirst causes

repeated a*a!enings" during *hich the practice of indirect techni4ues

may commence. 3n alternatie to depriing the body of *ater isincluding more salt in foods consumed before going to sleep.

3nother method is to drin! a lot of *ater before sleep" causing the

practitioner to a*a!en" naturally producing an opportunity to performindirect techni4ues. sing this has been !no*n to result in dream

consciousness.

3nother popular method helps *ith direct techni4ues. +t *or!s by

falling asleep *hile !eeping the forearm propped up at the elbo*.0hen the practitioner falls asleep" the forearm falls to the bed as the

body shuts do*n. Feeling the arm fall signals a lapse ofconsciousness" after *hich direct techni4ues may be attempted. +f this

method fails to produce results on the first try" it may be repeated by

raising the forearm before falling asleep. This method helps some"

but rarely on the first try. +t should not be counted as panacea.

2i!e all other non%autonomous methods" practicing phase entrance

using physiological signals should not be done on a regular basis.



There are more pleasant" autonomous techni4ues that only re4uire a

natural *illpo*er and healthy desire.

C9E,IC6< SUBS$6+CES

6ince the beginning" the history of adances in phase entrance

methodologies has included a direct lin! to the use of consumable

supplements" starting *ith plants and mushrooms in ancient times.

The use of speciali?ed herbs" mushrooms" and cacti is still practiced

in isolated culturesJ 6iberian shamans and orth 3merican +ndians"

for e&ample. 3mid the hunger for altered states of a*areness" these

chemical supplements hae reached eery corner of the deeloped*orld. 8o*eer" the proliferation of these substances has caused a

mar!ed degradation in the progress of modern phase practice.

The names and descriptions of these arious chemical

concoctions" herbs and plants included" are not *orthy of inclusion in

this te&t. They are officially considered illegal in some countries*hile still aailable in the pharmacies of othersJ neertheless" they

are all dangerous.

There are t*o primary problems *ith using such supplements.First" practicing the phase through the consumption of chemical

substances and arious herbal supplements is not a path to

deelopment" but to ruin. 9rug abuse and personal deelopment are polar opposites" in no *ay compatible. heap thrills are consistently

follo*ed by chemical dependencies and health problems.

6econd" although a user may e&perience phase sensations under

the influence of such substances" the 4uality of e&perience iscompletely different. +t is not only the stability or depth of phase that

are affected by these supplements" but a users consciousness anda*areness. The use of substances and the resultant alteration of

mental processes negatiely impact self%a*areness. The phase must

be accompanied by t*o things/ phase sensations and a complete"

conscious a*areness. +f one of these is missing" then the state

e&perienced" by definition" is not the phase. 0hen descriptions of



these chemically #enhanced$ e&periences are studied" the hallmar! of

eery one is a complete lac! of control.

sing any type of chemical or herbal substance to reach the phase

must be ruled out. 6ummarily" these ma!e it impossible to e&perience

the phase and ultimately destroy physical and mental health.

$9E 2U$U:E O2 +O+-6U$O+O,OUS ,E$9O(S

2O: E+$E:I+ $9E P96SE

Een though no beneficial non%autonomous technologies

currently e&ist" the future is *ide open before them.

0ith the deelopment of effectie technologies" the phase *illcease as the e&clusie domain of the initiated and become a

*idespread practice. Only then *ill the (sometimes 'ustified)

stereotypes and pre'udices connected to the mystical nature of the

phenomenon be dispelled" and only then *ill the phase gain the

necessary attention from researchers needed to ably deelop thescience of phase practice.

0hen e&ternally applied methods that cause phase entrance are

discoered" the human e&perience *ill drastically change. Thesetechnologies for inducing and monitoring phase e&periences *ill

open up incredible possibilities. For e&ample" it *ill be possible to

participate in a moie instead of 'ust *atchingJ people *ill be able totry and ealuate products *ithout leaing homeJ trael throughout

designed *orlds *ill ta!e placeJ computer games *ill be substituted

*ith analogous e&periences including real physical sensations.

The ultimate step *ould be the unification of phase e&periencesinto a collectie" parallel *orld integrated to e&istent digital

net*or!s/ the Matri& (the Mindnet). sing this Matri&" it *ill be possible to communicate *ith someone on the other side of the planet

% not 'ust through a broadband ideo lin!" but literally tCte D tCte.

This ision of the future is a drop in the ocean of possibilities that

*ill open *ith phase entrance technologies. The first step to*ard the

future is a thorough" pragmatic" and correct application of the

techni4ues no* aailable.



$YPIC6< ,IS$6>ES

WI$9 +O+-6U$O+O,OUS $EC9+I=UES

•The belief that deices are able to phase entrance if autonomous

techni4ues fail" een though it is much easier to enter the phase

through strictly indiidual efforts.

•0asting a large amount of time and effort on arious

technologies to create a phase state. o such technology e&ists.

•sing cueing technologies on a daily basis" een though they

arent supposed to be used more than t*ice a *ee!.

•sing cueing technologies all night long" *hen it is much betterto use these in con'unction *ith the deferred method.

•sing cueing technologies *ithout affirming a personal intention

of appropriate reaction to the signals/ this is crucial to cue

effectieness.

•0or!ing in pairs during the first hours of nighttime sleep" een

though REM sleep occurs infre4uently" and then for only short

periods of time.•0hile *or!ing in pairs" the helper giing an actie practitioner

too strong a signal. 6ignals should be !ept discreet to preent *a!ing

the sleeper.

•Employing an amateur hypnotist to increase the fre4uency of

dream consciousness.

•The use of hypnotic suggestion to a practitioner *ho is not

susceptible to hypnosis.

•sing physiological signals on a daily basis" causing physicaldiscomfort ersus getting en'oyment out of the practice.

•The belief chemical substances promote dissociatie e&periences.

3cting on this belief is e4uialent to drug abuse.

Eer!i&e& for Chapter *

=ue&tion&



1. 3re techni4ues based on breathing be considered non%

autonomous methods of entering the phase

-. 0hich non%autonomous and non%chemical means allo* phase

entrance after the first attempts

:. 0hy is it still not possible to create a deice that causes phaseentry

<. 3re cueing technologies beneficial to oercoming difficulties

*ith conscious a*a!ening

=. 0hat happens if a practitioner uses cueing technologies for

seen days in a ro*

>. an cueing technologies ma!e use of light signals

@. an feasting on peanuts before sleep help the process of phaseentry

A. 0ill putting a tight rubber band around an an!le promote

phase entry

B. 0hile *or!ing in a pair" are both practitioners re4uired to

enter the phase1C. an the helper be compared to a cueing deice *hile *or!ing

in a pair

11. 0hen should the helper gie the signal that the actie practitioner is dreaming

1-. 0ould a hypnotist ma!ing suggestions about entering the

phase be helpful to eery practitioner1:. 0hy do phase%inducing technologies sometimes *or!" een

though these are based on fla*ed theories

1<. 0hat is absent in a phase induced by chemical substances

$a&"&

1. Try using a cueing deice seeral times in con'unction *ith

the deferred method. reate a short sound file and set it to a

deice that plays the file bet*een 1=%minute interals of silence.

-. 7efore going to sleep at night" try the raised forearm method

of entering the phase seeral times. 3ttempt this using the

deferred method.



:. +f you hae the opportunity" try to achiee entry into the phase

by *or!ing in pairs.



Part II

,anaging the Out-of-Body Eperien!e

Chapter - (eepening

$9E CO+CEP$ O2 (EEPE+I+

3eepening refers to techni4ues that induce realistic perceptionand a&areness in the phase state( The phase is not an e&act" fi&ed state *here a practitioner is

present or not. +t is a realm of states characteri?ed by a transition

from the usual perception of the physical body to a complete

alienation from it" *hile maintaining consciousness and reality of

perception" albeit in a different frame of space. The transition begins

*ith perception of the natural" physical body follo*ed by a moment

of ambiguity *here a clear e&perience of body is intermingled *ith asense of the perceied body. 3fter*ard" the perceied body enters the

phase space" *hile the physical body becomes a memory. 3t this

point" the perceied senses may be 4uite dullJ for e&ample" ision

may be blurred or completely absent. 9eepening techni4ues sole the

problem of diminished or absent sensory perception in the phase. 6ensory e&periences *ithin a fully reali?ed phase e&perience are

as realistic as those in eeryday reality. +n almost one%half of all

cases" practitioners obsere that reality%based surroundings pale in

comparison to ibrant detail and color of the phase space. To this

end" after entering the phase" a practitioner must perform deepening

techni4ues to enhance and solidify the degree and 4uality of phasereality.



Interesting Fact!

The realis$ of a deep phase space is often so great

that it causes uncontrolla"le fear or shoc+(

9eepening should only be performed follo*ing complete

separation from the body. +f initiated before separation" the phase

may end prematurely. +f complete separation does not occur" primarydeepening should be used. 3s regards the deepening techni4ues

themseles" there is one main one and there are seeral subsidiary

ones. The main techni4ue" *hich does not present any difficulties" is

sufficient for haing a successful practice.

Interesting Fact!

gnorance of deepening techni4ues has led to a

great nu$"er of "aseless theories and superstitions(

So$e practices treat differing phase depths as

various states and even &orlds( n reality, there are

si$ple actions that ensure a singular phasee#perience(



Ealpation is the first deepening techni4ue that should be recalled

*hen entering the phase.

;ision may be absent at the beginning of a phase e&perience" but

the sensation of occupying a defined space is almost al*ays present.+n the case of a completely absent sense of sight" only tactile%

!inesthetic perception is possible. That is" moement throughout a

space and the touching ob'ects there is the only option *hen ision is

absent. The sense of touch plays a !ey role in the perception of

eeryday reality. 3ccordingly" if the sense of touch is actiely used in

the phase space" it is only natural that the phase *ill deepen and reach

its ma&imum potential. Palpation is performed by fleetingly touching anything that may

be found in the immediate surroundings. This should be done by

4uic!ly but carefully perceiing the feel of surfaces and shapes.

8ands should not remain on a particular place for more than one

second" remaining constantly in motion to locate ne* ob'ects. Thegoal of palpation is to touch and also to learn something about

encountered ob'ects or shapes. For e&ample" if one feels a mug" one

may touch it not only from the outside" but also from the inside. Oncea practitioner has rolled out of the body" the bed may be touchedJ the

physical body lying in bed may be touched" as *ell as the floor" the

carpet" nearby *alls" or a bedside table. 3nother palpation techni4ue is performed by rubbing the palms

against each other as if trying to *arm them on a cold day. 7lo*ing

on the palms also produces sensations that *ill help deepen the

phase. 6ince tactile perception of the *orld is not limited to the palms" the hands should be moed oer the entire body *hile in the

phase to e&cite and fully actiate the sense of touch. 3s soon as palpation begins" the feeling that the phase is

deepening and becoming fi&ed soon follo*s. sually" it ta!es fie to

1C seconds of palpation e&ercises to reach the ma&imum leel of

deepening. 3fter performing this techni4ue" the pseudo%physical

sensations *ill be indistinguishable from those of eeryday reality. +f

ision is absent on phase entry" it 4uic!ly emerges during palpation.



Eeering is the primary technical ariation of sensory

amplification. 8o*eer" it is not al*ays initially accessible since it

re4uires ision" *hich may begin as absent in the phase. Once ision

appears or has been created using special techni4ues (see hapter A)"

peering may begin. The effectieness of this techni4ue originates inthe fact that ision is the humans primary instrument of perception.

Therefore" by e&citing ision to its ma&imum potential *ithin the

phase" it is possible to attain a fully immersie phase state that is

completely apart from normal reality.

Peering should be done at a distance of four to si& inches from

ob'ects *ithin the phase. 3 practitioner should glance oer the

minute details of ob'ects and surfaces to bring definition to the phasespace *hile increasing the 4uality of ision. 0hen loo!ing at hands"

the lines of the palm or the fingernail and cuticles should be

e&amined. +f obsering a *all" study the te&ture of its *allpaper.

0hen loo!ing at a mug" one should loo! carefully at its handle" the

cure of its rim" or any inscriptions. 3ttention should not remain onone area of an ob'ect for more than half a second. 3ctie obseration

should constantly moe to ne* ob'ects and their minute details"

approaching ob'ects or pic!ing them up to dra* them nearer. +ts best*hen ob'ects near one anotherJ other*ise" too much time is spent

moing around.

Peering brings 4uic! and clear results. sually" if ision is blurryand there is a yearning to return into the physical body" *ith 'ust :%1C

seconds of peering all of this *ill be gone *ithout a trace. 3fter

peering" ision ad'usts as 4uic!ly and clearly as if a camera lens *as

correctly installed in front of the eyes" capturing the image in thesharpest of focus.

Si$ultaneous peering and palpation proide the ma&imum possible deepening effect in the phase. This method of sensory

amplification engages the t*o most important perceptie" thus the

effect is t*ice greater than *hen the t*o actions are separately

performed. +f ision is present in the phase" simultaneous peering and

palpation is an absolute necessity because it facilitates good phase

depth in the 4uic!est and simplest manner.



The combination of palpation and peering must not only be

performed simultaneously" but also upon the same ob'ects. For

e&ample" *hile a practitioner may loo! at the hands and

simultaneously rub them against each otherJ or *hile loo!ing at a

coffee mug" all of its parts may be obsered and touched at the same.+t is necessary to maintain dynamism of action" remembering that

feelings should be e&perienced not half%heartedly" remembering that

full concentration on sensory amplification is an e&cellent means to a

deep" 4uality phase.

SECO+(6:Y (EEPE+I+ $EC9+I=UES

(i?ing 9eadfir&t

9iing headfirst is used if sensory amplification techni4ues do

not *or!" or *hen the practitioner in the phase is located in an

undefined space *here there is nothing to touch or loo! at. This

techni4ue *or!s than!s to the unusual estibular sensations that itcauses" *hich help to enhance perception. This techni4ue is

performed *ith the eyes shut if ision is aailable and the practitioner

literally dies headfirst into the floor or space at the feet. 3 feeling ofmoement a*ay from the physical body *ill immediately arise

during the flight do*n" and the die itself *ill be e&perienced as if it

is really happening. 6imultaneously" the surrounding space maydar!en and become colder. 3gitation or fear may also appear. 3fter

fie to 1= seconds of flight" the practitioner is either arries in an

undetermined place in the phase or hits a dead end" li!e a *all. +n the

case of a dead end" a translocation techni4ue should be used.Translocation may also be attempted if deepening does not occur

during the flight" if sense perception stops improing" or if a gooddegree of realism has already been achieed. 3n alternatie to the

translocation techni4ue/ hold the hands about four to si& inches in

front of the face and try to obsere them *ithout opening the eyesJ

this *ill moe the practitioner to another random location.



0hen falling headfirst" do not thin! about the floorJ assume that it

*ill be penetrated. This ery effectie if the phase has not reached a

fullness of depth.

3 desire to not simply fall do*n obsering ones perceptions" but

instead race s*iftly do*n*ard *hile trying to moe a*ay from the body is e&tremely important. +n case of failure to do so" instead of

deepening" such a fall may lead to a return to the state of being

a*a!e" i.e. to a foul.

@i3ration

2i!e falling headfirst" the ibration techni4ue should be used if

sensory amplification techni4ues do not *or!" or *hen the practitioner in the phase is located in an undefined space *here there

is nothing to touch or loo! at.

3fter separating from the body" it is normally 4uite easy to create

ibrations by thin!ing about them" by straining the brain" or by

straining the body *ithout using muscles. The occurrence ofibrations proides a significant opportunity to deepen the phase. 3n

adantage of this techni4ue is that it does not re4uire any preliminary

actions and thus may be practiced at any moment. The brain is strained to the ma&imum e&tent possible" *hich

cause ibrations that may be intensified and managed through

spasmodic or prolonged straining. +f this techni4ue does not produce deepening after fie to 1C

seconds" the techni4ue has to be changed or action should be ta!en at

the practitioners current depth in the phase.

6ggre&&i?e 6!tion

This techni4ue may be used as an alternatie to any otherdeepening techni4ue since it can be used at any moment. Practicing

this techni4ue only re4uires aggressie action of the perceied body.

3 practitioner may run" roll on the floor" perform gymnastics" or

moe the arms and legs. Ma&imum actiity and aggression are

paramount to the successful use of this techni4ue.



+f the practitioner is stuc! in a dar! space" *aing the arms and

legs from side to side is appropriate. +f the practitioner is in *ater"

s*imming *ith determined" po*erful stro!es *ould be suitable

recourse. The type of action ery much depends on the specific

situation along *ith an aggressie desire on the part of the practitioner.

3s a rule" the effect of such moements and relocations comes

4uite 4uic!ly" especially if attention is focused on all the

accompanying sensations.

Imagining reality

This interesting techni4ue should be used by e&perienced practitioners" or if all other deepening techni4ues fail.

3 practitioner aggressiely imagines being located in the physical

*orld" e&periencing its intrinsic reality of perception" and not in the

phase. This should be done *hile in a state of separation from the

body *ith a sense of ision present. +f successful" the surrounding phase space *ill immediately brighten and sensory perception of the

phase *ill e&ceed the normal e&perience of reality.

+f this techni4ue produces no clear results after a fe* seconds"another techni4ue should be used.

E+E:6< 6C$I@I$Y

3ll deepening techni4ues should be practiced *ith a high leel of

aggression" *ith no pauses" only continuous" deliberate action. +f

techni4ues are practiced in a calm" rela&ed manner" then deepeningattempts *ill most often result in falling asleep or returning to the

body.

$YPIC6< ,IS$6>ES (U:I+ (EEPE+I+

•Forgetting to perform deepening techni4ues *hen necessary.

•arrying out unnecessary deepening *hile at a sufficient depth.



•8alting deepening techni4ues before reaching ma&imum realism

in the phase.

•arrying out main deepening techni4ues prior to haing become

completely separated from the body" although at this time only primary deepening should be used.

•ontinuing deepening techni4ues *hen results hae already been

achieed.

•3lternating too 4uic!ly bet*een deepening techni4ues instead of

concentrating on each of them for at least fie to 1C seconds.

•Performing the techni4ues slo*ly and calmly instead of

aggressiely.

•3pplying techni4ues of sensory amplification *hile stuc! in ashapeless" dar! space *hen these should only be performed in a iid

and realistic place.

•Obsering ob'ects located too far from the eyes during isual

sensori?ation instead of the re4uired four to fie inches.

•0hen peering" scrutini?ing a single detail of an ob'ect for too

long *hen it is necessary to 4uic!ly s*itch from one detail to

another.•Ta!ing in a *hole ob'ect *hen peering *hile only parts of it

should be obsered.

•oncentrating too long on the details of a single ob'ect instead of

focusing on different ob'ects in 4uic! succession.

•2ong palpation of a single ob'ect during sensory amplification

instead of rapidly s*itching from one ob'ect to another.

•9eepening *hile standing in place *hen it is important to

maintain constant motion.

•Falling headfirst *ith the eyes open" although the eyes must be

shut to aoid crashing into the floor.

•Falling headfirst *ithout the desire or intention of falling far and

4uic!ly.

•Forgetting to use translocation techni4ues after hitting a dead end.

•Forgetting to alternate deepening techni4ues if some of them are

not *or!ing.



•Fear of the hyperrealism of the e&perience and halting deepening

instead of calmly continuing *ith the techni4ue.

Eer!i&e& for Chapter

=ue&tion&

1. 3fter *hich phase entrance techni4ues is deepening

necessary

-. 0hy is phase deepening necessary

:. 3re there cases *here phase deepening is unnecessary

<. 0hat leel of reality should be achieed by deepening=. 0hen should deepening begin after entering the phase>. 9oes deepening influence the length of a phase e&perience

@. 0hy is primary deepening necessary

A. May one touch ones head *hen the performing sensori?ation

of feelings

B. 6hould a practitioner loo! at curtains *hile peering

1C. +s it effectie to apply peering at phase ob'ects from a distanceof 1 to 1.= yards

11. an peering be used during palpation

1-. 0hen should the eyes be closed *hile falling headfirst

1:. 0ould thro*ing punches li!e a bo&er help a practitioner to

deepen

1<. 8o* calmly should the deepening techni4ues be performed

$a&"&

1. 9eote the ne&t three successful phases to perfecting

deepening techni4ues" using all of the methods described in this

chapter.-. sing personal e&perience" try 'udging *hich techni4ue suits

you best from personal e&perience.



Chapter / - ,aintaining

$9E E+E:6< CO+CEP$ O2 ,6I+$6I+I+

Ehase $aintenance or >$aintaining? refers to techni4ues that

allo& a practitioner to re$ain in the phase for the $a#i$u$ a$ount

of ti$e possi"le( 0ithout !no*ledge of #maintaining$ techni4ues" theduration of the phase *ill be seeral times shorter than it could

other*ise be. The shortest phases last 'ust a fe* seconds. 7eginning

practitioners usually fear not being able to e&it a phaseJ this shouldnteer be a concern because the real challenge is being able to maintain

the phase state" *hich is easily lost unless phase maintenance

techni4ues are used.

Phase maintenance consists of three primary principles/ resisting a

return to the *a!eful state (!no*n as a foul)" resisting falling asleep"



and resisting a false e&it from the phase. 3s a rule" the first t*o

problems (return to a *a!eful state" or falling asleep) are often

encountered by beginners" but the third difficulty (false e&it)

manifests at later stages of practice.

Resistance to returning to the body is self%e&planatory" *hereasresistance to falling asleep is unclear to many. ot eeryone !no*s

that almost half of phase e&periences usually end in a 4uite triial

*ay % falling asleep. 3 person usually looses attentieness" his or her

a*areness dissipates" and eerything around gradually looses clarity

and turns into *hat is for all intents and purposes a usual dream.

Resisting a false e&it from the phase is a lot more surprising and

dramatic. 6ometimes a practitioner detects an impending e&it fromthe phase" subse4uent deepening techni4ues fail to *or!" resulting in

*hat seems to be a return to the body and physical reality. 6ure that

the phase has ended" a practitioner may stand up and the fall asleep

after perceiing a fe* steps. +n such cases" falling asleep most often

happens *ithout any moement" but *hile still lying in bed. The problem is that the difference bet*een the phase and reality can be so

subtle that in terms of internal or e&ternal indicators" the phase

practically cant be distinguished from reality. Therefore" one must!no* the necessary actions to ta!e in the eent that the phase ceases"

since the end of a phase could actually be a tric! and purely

imagined. There are specific solutions for the three problems described in

addition to general rules that apply to any phase e&perience. 6tudying

these rules should be gien 'ust as high a priority as studying the

specific solutions" since only some of them" *hen applied separately"may help one to remain in the phase seeral times longer than usual.

+n some cases" techni4ues for maintaining are not applicable.8o*eer" !no*ledge of ho* to maintain is useful for the ma'ority of

e&periences. 3lso" there might be situations *hen someone need only

resist a foul" *hile someone else may need to resist falling asleep. 3ll

of this is ery specific to each case and can be determined only in

practice.



0ith perfect !no*ledge of all the techni4ues for maintaining" a

phase may last t*o to four minutes" *hich doesnt sound li!e an

e&tended duration" but really is. 3 particularity of the phase space is

that achieing something and moing around in it ta!es a minimum

amount of time" mere seconds. Thus" so much can be done during :minutes in the phase that one literally needs a list" so as not to *aste

any time.

There are theories that hae neither been proen nor disproen

claiming that time in the phase contracts and e&pands relatie to real

time. Thus" one minute of real time *hile in the phase may feel much

longer in terms of phase time.

Perception of time aries from practitioner to practitioner. oicesespecially perceie a real minute as more li!e fie to 1C minutes in

the phase. This is determined by the particularities of indiidual

psychology" state of mind" and the type of eents that occur in the

phase.

+n order to understand ho* long a phase really lasted" one does notneed to try using a stop*atch in the real *orld. +t is better to count

ho* many actions too! place in it and ho* much time each of them

could hae ta!en. The result *ill differ from ones first roughestimate seeral times oer.

The ma&imum duration the phase aries depends heaily on the

ability to apply phase maintenance techni4ues. 6ome practitionershae difficulty brea!ing the t*o%minute barrier *hile some find it

easy to remain in the phase for 1C minutes or longer. +t is physically

impossible to remain in the phase foreer because een a -C%minute

phase is unheard of. $EC9+I=UES 6+( :U<ES 66I+S$

:E$U:+I+ $O $9E BO(Y

Of the follo*ing techni4ues" constant sensory amplification and

as%needed sensory amplification are applied the most often *hile

performing phase maintenance. 8o*eer" as opposed to other

technical elements of phase e&ploration" other secondary techni4ues



of maintaining often become mainstream and the most appropriate

for certain indiiduals. Thus" all the techni4ues should be studied" but

the first t*o should be considered ery carefully.

Con&tant Sen&ory 6mplifi!ation

The same sensory amplification described in the chapter on

deepening (hapter >) also applies to #maintaining$. +n essence"

haing achieed the necessary depth of phase" one should not stop to

actiely agitate his or her perception but should !eep on doing this all

the *hile" albeit not as actiely as during deepening.

The idea is that during the entire duration of the phase" all action

should be focused on e&periencing the ma&imum possible amount oftactile%!inesthetic and isual perceptions. This entails constantly

touching and e&amining eerything in minute detail. For e&ample" if

passing by a boo!case" touch and e&amine some of the boo!s in it"

including their pages and corners. Tactile obseration should be

performed on eery encountered ob'ect. Palpation may be applied separately as a bac!ground sensation.

This is done in order not to oerload the sense of sight. The hands

should be touching something all the time" or better still" rubbingeach other.

6&-+eeded Sen&ory 6mplifi!ation

3pplying the as%needed sensory amplification techni4ue is no

different than constant sensory amplification. +t is used only *hen a

foul (a return to a *a!eful state) is imminent or *hen phase ision

starts to blur and fade. For e&ample" *hile traeling in the phaseeerything may start to blur" signaling a *ea!ening of the phase. 3t

this moment" the practitioner should touch eery aailable ob'ectJobsere eerything in fine detail. 3s soon as returns to a clear and

realistic state" actions may be continued *ithout needing to perform

amplification.

Con&tant @i3ration



This techni4ue is used to maintain constant" strong ibrations in

the phase. 3s preiously noted" ibrations are generated by straining

the brain or tensing the body *ithout using muscles. Maintaining

strong ibrations *ill hae a positie effect on the length of the

phase.

Strengthening @i3ration& a& +eeded

+n this case" ibrations are created and strengthened only if signs

of a foul become apparent. E&amples of foul indicators include

duality of perception or blurred ision. 6trengthening ibrations *ill

help to deepen the phase" allo*ing a practitioner to stay and continue

*ithin the phase.

(i?ing 9eadfir&t

This techni4ue is the same as the deepening techni4ue of the same

name. +f a phase is about to dissole" diing headfirst *ith the eyes

shut and a desire to die as 4uic!ly and deeply as possible. 3s soonas phase depth returns" translocation techni4ues may be used to !eep

from arriing at a dead end.

2or!ed 2alling 6&leep

3s soon as indicators of a foul appear" immediately lie do*n on

the floor and attempt forced falling asleepJ the same as the phaseentry techni4ue. 3fter successfully performing the techni4ue (:%

1Csec.) " a practitioner may get up and continue to trael through the

phase since the perception of reality and its depth *ill most li!ely be

restored. Resist actually fall asleep.

:otation

+f indicators of a foul appear" the practitioner should start rotating

around the head%to%feet a&is. nli!e the phase entry techni4ue of the

same name" the moement does not hae to be imagined. This is an

absolutely real rotation in the phase. 3fter seeral reolutions" depth

*ill be restored and actions may be continued. +f indicators of a foul

persist" rotation should continue until proper depth is achieed.



Counting

9uring the entire phase" count to as large a number possible % not

'ust for the sa!e of counting" but *ith a strong desire to reach the

highest number possible. ounting may be performed silently or outloud.

This techni4ue *or!s by creating a strong determination to

remain in the phase by proiding a goal that re4uires action in the

phase.

<i&tening in

+f there are any bac!ground sounds similar to those heard *hileentering the phase % rumbling" *histling" ringing" bu??ing" or si??ling

I these sounds may be used to prolong duration of the phase by

aggressie attempts at listening in" hearing the entire range of internal

sounds. The forced listening in techni4ue may also be used for phase

maintenance.

9oo"ing onto the pha&e

3nother interesting method of #maintaining$ is hoo!ing onto the phase. +n the eent of an impending foul" grab onto an ob'ect in the

phase actiely palpate or s4uee?e it. Een if a return to the body

occurs during this techni4ue" the hands *ill continue to hold the phase ob'ect and the physical hands *ill not be perceied. 7eginning

*ith these phantom feelings in the hands" separation from the body is

possible. 3ny nearby ob'ect may be hoo!ed/ the leg of a chair" a

drin!ing glass" a door!nob" a stone" or a stic!. +f there is nothing tograb hold of" clasp the hands together or bite do*n on a lip or the

tongue.

T*o rules apply to using the techni4ues that help to resist a phase

e&it. First of all" neer thin! that the phase might end and result in a

return to the bodyJ thoughts li!e this are li!e programming that

immediately send the practitioner to a *a!ened physical state.



6econdly" do not thin! about the physical body. 9oing *ill also

instantly return the practitioner to the body" eery time.



$EC9+I=UES 66I+S$

6+ U+:ECO+IE( P96SE

6ince the techni4ues of testing the realness of the end of the phase

are a little absurd and demand additional attention to actions" theyshould only be used in those cases *hen they are indeed re4uired.

ntil then" one should simply bear them in mind and use them only

in moments of doubt. The same methods may be used to safely

determine *hether or not the practitioner is in the phase *hen using

techni4ues for entering it.

9yper-!on!entration 6ince the cessation of the phase e&perience may be simulated and

no different in terms of perception from a real e&it" differences

bet*een the physical *orld and the phase *orld must be actiely

discerned. +n other *ords" a practitioner must !no* ho* to determine

*hether a genuine phase e&it has occurred. 3t present" only one e&periment is !no*n to guarantee an

accurate result. The phase space cannot *ithstand prolonged close

isual attention to the minute details of ob'ects. 0ithin seeralseconds of acute e&amination" shapes begin to distort" ob'ects change

color" produce smo!e" melt" or morph in other *ays.

3fter e&iting the phase" loo! at a small ob'ect from a distance offour to si& inches" and remain focused on it for 1C seconds. +f the

ob'ect does not change" a practitioner can be assured that the

surroundings are reality. +f an ob'ect is someho* distorted or as!e*"

a practitioner !no*s that the phase is intact. The simplest option is toloo! at the tip of the finger since it is al*ays close at hand. +t is also

possible to ta!e a boo! and e&amine its te&t. Te&t in the phase *illeither blur or appear as alphabetical gibberish" or full of

incomprehensible symbols.

6uiliary te!hni%ue&

There are a ariety of other procedures to test the occurrence of a

foul. 8o*eer" since any situation" any property" or any function can



be simulated in the phase" these procedures are not al*ays applicable.

For e&ample" some suggest that it is sufficient to attempt doing

something that is realistically impossible" and" if a practitioner is in

the phase" the impossible action *ill be possible. The problem *ith

this suggestion is that the la*s of the physical *orld may besimulated in the phase" so flying" passing through *alls or tele!inesis

may not be possible" een in the deepest phase. +t has also been

suggested that loo!ing at a cloc! t*ice in a ro* may help a

practitioner determine *hether or not the phase is intactJ allegedly"

the cloc! *ill display a different time each time it is obsered. 8ere

again" the cloc!s display may not change in the phase.

Of all the au&iliary procedures" one deseres mention and *or!sin the ma'ority of cases/ searching for differences from reality in the

surroundings. 3lthough the usual surroundings of a practitioner may

be 1CCK accurately simulated in the phase" it is ery rare. Therefore"

it is possible to figure out *hether a phase is intact by carefully

e&amining the room *here eerything is ta!ing place. +n the phase"there *ill be something e&tra or something *ill be missingJ the time

of day or een the season *ill be different from reality" and so on.

For e&ample" *hen erifying *hether a foul occurred" a room may bemissing the table supporting a teleision set" or the table may be

there" but be a different color.

E+E:6< :U<ES 2O: ,6I+$6I+I+

The rules for maintaining the phase deal *ith resisting all or most

of the problems *hich cause a phase to end. 6ome of these rules arecapable of increasing the length of stay in the phase by many times

and must be follo*ed.

The practitioner should not loo+ into the distance( +f fara*ay

ob'ects are obsered for a long period of time" a foul may occur" or

one may be translocated to*ards these ob'ects. +n order to loo! at

distant ob'ects *ithout problems" a practitioner has to employ

techni4ues for maintaining. For e&ample" from time to time the



practitioner should loo! at his hands" rub them against each other" or

maintain strong ibrations.

:onstant activity( nder no circumstances should a practitioner

remain passie and calm in the phase. The more actions performed"

the longer the phase is. The fe*er actions I the shorter the phase. +t isenough to pause for thought" and eerything stops.

Elan of action( There should be a clear plan of action consisting

of at least = tas!s to be carried out in the phase at the earliest

opportunity. This is necessary for seeral important reasons. First" the

practitioner must not pause in the phase to thin! about #*hat to do

ne&t$" *hich fre4uently results in a foul. 6econd" haing a plan" the

practitioner *ill subconsciously perform all of the actions necessaryfor staying in and maintaining the phase to carry out all the tas!s that

hae been planned. Third" intelligent and pre%planned actions permit

focused adancement of purposeful actions ersus *asting phase

e&periences on *hateer comes to mind at a gien moment. Fourth" a

plan of action creates necessary motiation and" conse4uently" pronounced intent to perform the techni4ues to enter the phase.

Stopping the 3( The less +nternal 9ialogue (+9) and reflection

that occurs in the phase" the longer it lasts. 3ll thin!ing must beconcentrated on *hat is being achieed and perceied. Tal!ing to

oneself is completely prohibited. The reason for this is that many

thoughts may act as programming in the phase and een announcingthem internally may introduce alterations" including negatie ones.

For e&ample" thin!ing about the body cause a return to it. The

practitioner may also get lost in thought" *hich *ill lead to a foul.

3lso" sporadic thoughts usually and 4uite easily cause the practitionerto simply fall asleep.

% practitioner $ust try to re-enter the phase after e#periencing a

foul( 3l*ays remember that a typical phase e&perience consists of

seeral repeated entries and e&its. Essentially" in most cases it is

possible to re%enter the phase through the use of separation or phase

state creation techni4ues immediately after returning to the body. +f

the practitioner has 'ust left the phase" the brain is still close to it and



appropriate techni4ues may be applied in order to continue the

'ourney.

$YPIC6< ,IS$6>ES WI$9 ,6I+$6I+I+

•Forgetting to try to re%enter the phase after it is oer" although

doing so greatly helps to increase number of e&periences had.

•6taying focused on techni4ues for #maintaining$ instead of

performing them as bac!ground tas!s.

•5etting distracted by eents and dropping phase maintenance

techni4ues instead of continually performing *hats needed tomaintain the phase.

•6uccumbing to the idea that maintaining is not necessary *hen

the phase appears ery deep and stable" een though these could befalse sensations.

•sing the necessary techni4ues too late.

•6topping due to uncertainty about further actions" *hile there

must al*ays be a plan.•Forgetting that it is possible to fall asleep in the phase *ithout

reali?ing it. Recogni?ing the ris! of falling asleep must be a primary

focus.

•5etting pulled into eents occurring in the phase instead of

obsering and controlling them from the outside.

•Forgetting that techni4ues for #maintaining$ must al*ays be used

to remain in as deep a phase as possible" and not 'ust for maintaining

any odd state.•6topping the use of techni4ues for #maintaining$ during contact

*ith liing ob'ects" *hen the techni4ues must be used constantly.

•ounting *ithout the desire to count as high as possible.

•Performing imagined rotation instead of real rotation.

•Passieness and calmness instead of constant actiity.

•E&cessie thin!ing and internal dialogue *hen these should be

!ept to an absolute minimum.



Eer!i&e& for Chapter /

=ue&tion&

1. 0hat is a foul

-. 0hat is the minimum duration of the phase

:. 0hat do phase maintenance (#maintaining$) techni4ues

counteract besides fouls and falling asleep

<. 0hy might a practitioner thin! that the phase has ended *hen itactually is still in progress

=. 6hould #maintaining$ techni4ues al*ays be used

>. 0hat primary techni4ues *or! against the occurrence of fouls@. 8o* can a practitioner hoo! onto the phase

A. 0hile in the phase" *hat do thoughts about the body lead to

B. 0hat 4uestion should be as!ed in the phase in order to reduce the probability of falling asleep

1C. 0hat happens to an ob'ect during hyper%concentration

11. 8o* else" apart from hyper%concentration" might a practitioner

effectiely recogni?e a false foul

1-. 0hile in the phase" is it permitted to loo! into the distance for a

long time1:. 0hat is +9 and ho* does the degree of it affect the duration of a

phase e&perience

1<. 0hat should a practitioner al*ays do after an inadertent return

into the body

$a&"&

1. 9uring the ne&t fe* phases" dedicate yourself to the single

goal of maintaining as long as possible" using as many

maintaining techni4ues as you can.

-. Figure out *hich techni4ues hae proen the most effectie

and comfortable for you" so that you may use these later.:. +ncrease the duration of your aerage phase to at least :

minutes (ealuated ob'ectiely).



Problems *ith phase identification during entry often arise at the

initial stages of studying the phase. 3 practitioner simply cannot

understand *hether or not he or she is already in the phase. This

uncertainty can manifest *hile lying do*n or *hile practicing in

other postures. +f a practitioner is simply lying do*n" physically perceiing his o*n

body" and doing nothing" then it is indeed difficult to determine

*hether or not he is present in the phase. +t is sufficient to note that

there might be no signs of a phase state. On the contrary" there may

be a host of signs and unusual sensations" but they by no means

necessarily indicate the onset of the phase.

The problem of the uncertainty of a phase state is al*ays soledthrough actions. +f the practitioner is lying do*n" then standard

separation techni4ues may produce indication of phase achieement %

in the ma'ority of cases I since such techni4ues may often be

incorrectly performed.

+t is possible to perform techni4ues that are only achieable in the phase state. +f a practitioner stands up and does not recogni?e his

surroundings" then it can be assumed that the practitioner is standing

up in the phase. 8o*eer" often based on the obseration that#eerything is as in reality$" a practitioner may stand up and note that

eerything is in fact #as in reality$ simply because the practitioner is

still in #reality$. +n ans*er to this dilemma" the phenomenon ofhyper%concentration has been preiously mentioned in relation to

maintaining phase. 7y using hyper%concentration" it is al*ays

possible to ascertain *hether the practitioner is in the phase.

8o*eer" as a rule" hyper%concentration is rarely necessary. Mostoften" the follo*ing signs indicate that separation has occurred in the

phase/ unusual sensations in the body during moement" e&tremetightness during moement" a strong physical urge to lie bac! do*n"

dis'ointedness of surroundings" and blurred or complete absence of

ision.

Often" the problem resides in the use of direct techni4ues *here the

practitioner e&pects fast results and attempts to determine *hether the

phase has been achieed. 3s a principle this should not be done.



0hen using direct techni4ues" the phase manifests itself clearlyJ

therefore" if an attempt to determine its presence is made" it is an

indicator that the phase is 4uite li!ely still far off.

E,E:E+CY :E$U:+. P6:6<YSIS

6tatistics sho* that in one%third of initial phase e&periences" a practitioner is faced *ith a degree of fear that forces a return to the

body. Periodically" een e&perienced practitioners face situations that

re4uire an abrupt return to *a!efulness. This presents a number of

concerns.

+n and of itself" returning to the body is almost al*aysunproblematicJ remembering and thin!ing about the body oftensuffices and *ithin moments the practitioner is returned to the body

from *hateer location in the phase. 3dmittedly" it is adisable

during this type of situation to shut the eyes and abstain from

touching anything. 3s a rule" *hen these actions are performed"

simply standing up in the physical *orld is all that is re4uired to

complete a returnJ ho*eer" this is not al*ays simply achieed.

6ometimes after reentering the body" the practitioner suddenlyreali?es that physical functionality has ceased due to the onset of

sleep paralysis" or the sensation that the body has been s*itched off.

9uring sleep paralysis" it is impossible to scream" call for help" or

een moe a finger. +n the ma'ority of cases" it is also impossible to

open the eyes. From a scientific point of ie*" this is a case of anabrupt" unnatural interruption of the rapid eye moement (REM)

phase of sleep" during *hich this paralysis is al*ays present" and it

can persist for some time after the phase is interrupted.

This is *here it gets interesting. People in the physical *orld are

accustomed to an important rule/ if you *ish to achiee something"

then do it" and do it as actiely as possible. This rule" though good" isnot al*ays applicable to certain conditions lin!ed to the phase" and

applies least of all to e&iting the phase. 6ometimes e&treme effort

ma!es it possible to brea! through sleep paralysis and resume

moement" though most of these efforts tend to e&acerbateimmobility.



9ue to the unusual nature of a negatie situation follo*ing a

deliberate" fear%induced return to the body" the depth of the phase

may greatly increase because of the bodys natural" protectie

inhibition of functions originating in the cerebral corte&J this results

in een greater agitation" greater fear. The paralysis gro*s stronger.This is a icious circle that leads to unpleasant feelings and emotions"

*hich may eaporate any desire to practice the phase.

+gnorance of correct procedures has led to the *idespread opinion

that such aderse situations may ma!e it impossible to come bac!

from the phase at all. These opinions suppose that it is" therefore"

dangerous to get inoled *ith the practice. 8o*eer" the solution to

this problem rests in ery simple actions and procedures that can preent a large number of negatie e&periences/

Complete :elaation

+n the section on deepening and maintaining" it *as noted that the

more actie a practitioner is *hile in the phase" the better.onersely" if there is less actiity" the 4uality of the phase declines"

allo*ing for an easy e&it. Thus" in order to leae the phase" the

practitioner only needs to completely rela& and ignore any perceiedsensations" actions" or thoughts. 3 practitioner may also recite a

prayer" mantra" or rhyme" since that helps the consciousness to be

distracted from the situation more 4uic!ly. Of course" one needs tocalm do*n and try to get rid of the fear" *hich in and of itself is

capable of !eeping such a state going. Periodically" the practitioner

should try to moe a finger in order to chec! *hether attempts at

rela&ation hae had an effect.

Con!entration on a 2inger

3 practitioner e&periencing sleep paralysis should try moing a

finger or a toe. 3t first this *ont *or!" but the practitioner has to

concentrate precise thought and effort on the action. 3fter a little

*hile" the physical finger *ill begin to moe. The problem *ith this

techni4ue is that the practitioner may accidentally start ma!ing

phantom motions instead of physical moements" *hich is *hy an



understanding of the difference bet*een the t*o sensations is

necessary" since it is often not ery obious.



Con!entration on Po&&i3le ,o?ement&

The physiology of sleep paralysis" the phase state" and dreams are

such that *hen the practitioner is in one of these states" some actions

are al*ays associated *ith moements made in the real body. This is

true *hen moing the eyeballs" the tongue" or *hile breathing. +f the practitioner concentrates attention on these processes" it is possible

counteract inhibitions to physical moementJ as a result" a sleep%

paraly?ed practitioner *ill become able to moe in reality.

:ee?aluating the Situation

nder normal circumstances" deliberate e&it from the phase is not

the norm. 9eliberate e&it is commonly caused by certain fears and pre'udices. +f a practitioner is not able to actiate the body using

other emergency return techni4ues" a careful consideration the

possibilities offered by the phase is recommended. There are manyinteresting and useful things that can be e&perienced in the phase.

0hy ruin the possibility of great opportunity because of a baseless

fear

To be fair" it must be noted that emergency e&it techni4ues do not

al*ays *or!. 3s a rule" after a long period of sleep depriation" or at

the beginning of or in the middle of a nights sleep" the urge to sleepis so great that it is difficult to resist the sleep paralysis phenomenon.

+n this respect" reealuating the situation is highly recommended so

that a practitioner is able to ta!e adantage of the situation ersus

suffering by it. 6leep paralysis is easily transmuted into a phase state

by means of indirect techni4ues.

By the &ay, +no&ing ho& to e#it paralysis is i$portant not only for practitioners of the phase, since such paralysis occurs even&ithout the phase for appro#i$ately one-third of the hu$an

population at least once in a lifeti$e( t usually happens "efore or

after sleep(

2I9$I+ 2E6:



Fear in the phase is a ery common occurrence. The practitioner

may e&perience fear at any stage" although it is e&pressed much more

clearly during initial practice. The causes of fear are ery dierse/ a

feeling that returning to the body is impossibleJ a fear of deathJ

*orrying that something bad is going to happen to the bodyJencountering something scary and terrible in the phaseJ painful

sensationsJ oerly sharp" hyper%realistic sensations. One fear

dominates all others/ the instinct of self%preseration" *hich" *ithout

any apparent reason" can induce a feeling of absolute horror I a

feeling that cannot be e&plained or controlled.

For a noice stric!en by insurmountable fear that causes

paralysis" there is only one *ay to gradually oercome. Each time anoice enters the phase" an attempt should be made to go a step

further than the preious time. For e&ample" in spite of feeling

terrified" the practitioner should try to raise the hands and then moe

them bac! to the initial position. The second time" the practitioner

should attempt to sit do*n. The third time" standing up should beattempted. The fourth time" *al!ing around in the phase is adised.

Then" after incremental steps to*ard e&periencing the harmlessness

of the phase state" productie" calm action may ensue.

Interesting fact!

Fear itself can "e used to enter the phase and re$ain there for a

long ti$e( Once fears are allayed, a cal$ed practitioner ise#periences increased difficulty &ith entry into the phase(

For a practitioner *ho faces periodical fears" reali?ing that there isno real danger encourages progress in practice. rges to rapidly

return to the body are then made baseless. 6ooner or later" calmerthought dominates eents in the phase" and fear happens less often.

0hen dealing *ith momentary fear caused by eents in the phase"

the simplest solution is to tac!le it head%on and follo* through to the

end in order to aoid a fear%drien precedent. +f a practitioner al*ays

runs a*ay from undesirable eents" the eents *ill occur more and

more fre4uently. +f a practitioner is incapable of facing fear in the



phase" it is best to use the translocation techni4ue to trael else*here"

although this solution only produces temporary relief.



C:E6$IO+ O2 @ISIO+

;ision is often aailable at the ery beginning of a phase"

especially *hen the practitioner uses image obseration and

isuali?ation techni4ues to enter. 6ometimes ision appears *ithinthe first fe* seconds. Other times" it manifests during the deepening

process. 8o*eer" there are cases *here ision is not aailable and

must be created 4uic!ly" at any cost. ;ision may arrie as soon as it

is thought about" but if this does not occur" a special techni4ue is

necessary.

To create ision" a practitioner needs to bring the hands four to si&

inches in front of the eyes and try to detect them through the graynessor dar!ness. Peering aggressiely and attentiely at the minute details

of the palms *ill cause them to appear" much li!e they are being

deeloped on Polaroid film. 3fter seeral seconds" ision *ill

become clear" and along *ith the palms" the surroundings *ill also

become isible.nder no circumstances should the physical eyelids be opened.

;ision *ill appear on its o*n and *ill not differ from that of reality

and the physical sensation of opened eyes *ill emerge. +t is possibleto shut the eyes in the phase an infinite number of times" een

*ithout haing opened them at all" since the latter is not needed for

creating ision. The physical eyelids may be open only *hilee&periencing a ery deep phase. +n a shallo* phase" opening the eyes

*ill cause a return to *a!efulness.

The practitioner must also !eep in mind that ision should only

be created after a complete separation from the body and asubse4uent translocation has been achieed. 3ttempting to ie* the

hands during flight or *hile hoering in an unidentified space leadsto arbitrary translocation.

CO+$6C$ WI$9 <I@I+ OBGEC$S

T*o problems may surface *hile conersing *ith animate ob'ects

in the phase/ silence or a return to the body. +n ie* of the fact that



many phase applications are based on contact *ith people for one

purpose or another" it is necessary to understand ho* to correctly

manage contact *ith liing ob'ects.

+n order to aoid a foul (e'ection from the phase into reality)" the

elementary rules of #maintaining$ must be obsered. 3ctielyobsering the facial features or clothing of a person you *ant to

communicate *ith. 0hile communicating" the practitioner should

constantly rub the hands together or maintain strong ibrations by

straining the brain. Remember to perform the techni4ues to aoid

becoming absorbed in communication.

3 more comple& problem is oercoming the communicatie

unresponsieness of ob'ects in the phase. +n many cases" the speechof an ob'ect is bloc!ed by the internal stress of the practitioner.

6ometimes the problem stems from an e&pectation that an ob'ect *ill

not be able to communicate in the phase.

+t is important to treat the ob'ects in a calm manner. There is no

use trying to shout or beat the ob'ect to force communication. On thecontrary" it is much more effectie to treat the ob'ect gently" *ithout

applying pressure. 9o not peer at an ob'ects mouth" e&pecting

sounds to emerge. +t is better to loo! else*hereJ ta!ing a passieinterest in communication generally yields the best results.

3s a rule" the first time that communication *ith a liing ob'ect is

successful" future attempts go unhindered. ommunication methods in the phase are should be no different

than those used in ordinary life/ tal!ing" facial e&pressions" gesturing

*ith the hands" body language. Telepathy is not necessary.

:E6(I+

Reading te&t in the phase may be accompanied by a number of

difficulties. First" small print becomes illegible because the affects of

hyper%concentration may distort te&t. This problem is soled by using

large%font te&tual sources of information. For e&ample" the te&t of a

normal boo! blurs *hen obsered too attentiely" but the large font



on the coer of a boo! is easily read since its si?e is sufficient for

rapid reading *ithout detailed scrutiny.

The second problem encountered *hile reading in the phase is

*hen te&t is legible but is completely meaningless in compositionJ

gibberish. This problem is soled by turning oer the pages" loo!ingfor a readable message. +t is also possible to find another copy or

create it ane* using the ob'ect%finding techni4ues. The same applies

to cases *here the te&t is seen as a set of incomprehensible symbols

or signs.

0hile reading in the phase" the practitioner should not forget

about performing #maintaining$ techni4ues to preent a foul by

becoming too rela&ed.

@IB:6$IO+S

The phase is often accompanied by an unforgettably unusual

sensation that may be used successfully to enter" deepen or maintain

the phase. +t is difficult to describe it better than the sensation of a

heay current passing through the entire body *ithout causing any pain. +t may also feel li!e the *hole body is contracting" or a tingling

sensation similar to numbness. Most often" the sensations are similar

to high%fre4uency ibrations of the body" *hich e&plains the origin of

the term #ibration$.

+f the practitioner is not sure *hether or not he e&perienced

ibrations" then there is a good method to sole his problem/ if hereally did" he *ill not hae any doubts about it. +n all other cases"

*hen there are doubts and uncertainty" the practitioner is definitelynot dealing *ith ibrations" or is dealing *ith another form thereof.

+f you hae e&perienced ibrations at least once" the recollection of

these sensations helps greatly during the simultaneous application of

indirect techni4ues. They are created" supported and strengthened bystraining the brain or tensing the body *ithout using the muscles. For

ibrations to appear" it often suffices merely to thin! about them.

9uring the first e&perience" one should e&periment *ith them for a



*hile by rolling them around the body and its parts" as *ell as

strengthening and *ea!ening them.

0o&ever, one should not thin+ that the presence of vi"rations is a

necessary condition for "eing in the phase( Many noices often strie

not for the phase but for ibrations" after *hich the former mustsupposedly follo*. That should not be the case. There are indeed

specific techni4ues that ma!e it possible to get into the phase by

creating ibrations" but in all other cases they are not necessary and

some practitioners may neer hae them at all.

$EC9+I=UES 2O: $:6+S<OC6$I+

$9:OU9 OBGEC$S

+n a deep phase" the properties of the surrounding enironment

become ery similar to the physical *orld. 8o*eer" it may

sometimes be necessary to pass through a *all or translocate to aoid

a physical barrier in the phase. There are t*o basic options for

passing through barriers li!e *alls. sually" mastering these re4uires

seeral attempts.

Interesting fact!

f a practitioner concentrates on the physical

sensations associated &ith passing through a &all,

it is possi"le to get stuc+( % practitioner $ay even

e#perience the feeling of o"structed "reathing &henthis happens( %t such a ti$e it is necessary to

return to the "ody(

:apid (efo!u&ed Penetration

Run or 'ump at a *all *ith a burning desire to penetrate it. 9ont

focus on the *allJ instead concentrate on the immediate

surroundings. 9o not try to ta!e anything from the current location

since this may impede a successful passage through the *all.

$he Clo&ed Eye& $e!hni%ue



0hen approaching a *all" the practitioner must close his eyes and

completely focus on a desire to pass through it *hile imagining that

the *all does not e&ist" or that it is transparent and penetrable.

6urface resistance should be pressed through" continuing on *ith the

aggressie desire and concentration.

2<I9$

Ta!ing flight in the phase is a simple matter of remembering past

dreams of flight. othing needs to be tensed" no *ord need to be

said. 3ttempting flight *ith closed eyes produces a high rate of

success" but presents an increased probability of inadertenttranslocation.

+f a flight attempt is unsuccessful" a practitioner may try 'umping

from a high eleation or from a *indo*. The natural instinct of

dream flight ta!es oer and the fall becomes a controlled flight.

8o*eer" 'umping from *indo*s or other eleations is adisableonly to practitioners *ith e&perience" since noices may not al*ays

be able to determine *hether they are in the phase or in reality.

3nother *ay to fly is to try to suspend oneself in the air *hen 'umping up.

SUPE:-6BI<I$IES

The realism of the phase space does not impose limits on the

ability to perform actions that cannot be performed in the physical

*orld. +t is important to remember that only a practitionersapprehension places limits on *hat may be done in the phase.

For e&ample" if a practitioner needs to get to a location % eenery far a*ay % it may be reached by teleportation. +f an ob'ect needs

to be moed from one side of the room to the other" it may be moed

by tele!inesis. One of the ma'or benefits of the phase e&perience is

unencumbered freedom of action.

To master unusual abilities" only a fe* phases need to be spent in

concentrated deelopment of the methods.



$ele"ine&i&

+n order to learn tele!inesis (moing ob'ect by thought)" the

practitioner concentrate on an ob'ect *hile e&periencing a deepened

phase" and attempt to moe the ob'ect by thin!ing about themoement. The only re4uired action is aggressie isuali?ation of the

ob'ects moement. o specific e&ternal actions are re4uired.

Tele!inetic ability is inherent to eery human being. +f attempts are

unsuccessful at first" press on. 7efore too long" the full effect of the

practitioners *ill yield results. sing this ability helps to encourage

a good phase e&perience by proiding a tool for carrying out planned

tas!s.

Pyro"ine&i&

+gniting an ob'ect in the phase 'ust by staring at it re4uires a

strong desire to heat up and set fire to the ob'ect. Performed

successfully" an ob'ect *ill smo!e" distort" dar!en and then burst intoflames.

$elepathy To deelop telepathy in the phase" it is necessary to peer at

animate ob'ects *hile listening surrounding e&ternal and internal

sounds *ith the intention of hearing thoughts e&pressed by thought.Een e&perienced practitioners encounter difficulty *hile deeloping

telepathy" but *hen successful" contact *ith people in the phase is

substantially simplified. sing telepathy" discerning the thoughts of

people" animals" and ob'ects is possible. 8o*eer" this should not beta!en too seriously" since it is merely the nature of the phase to

simulate *hat is e&pected.

$ran&mutation

Transforming an ob'ects form re4uires the techni4ue of

transmutation (refer to hapter B). +t should also be noted that if the

goal is not to conert something but rather to transform oneself" then

it is necessary to use the translocation techni4ues (also described in



hapter B)" *hereby attention has to be concentrated not on the

desired place but on the desired form. 8ere again there are no

limitations apart from indiidual courage and fantasy. +t is possible to

become a butterfly or a dinosaur. +t is possible to become a bird or a

*orm. +ts een possible to become a child or a person of theopposite se&. These are not simply e&ternal changes" but real

transmutations" *ithin and *ithout. +f a practitioner becomes a

butterfly" it accompanies the sensation of haing *ings" many legs"

and an unusual body. The practitioner *ill intuitiely !no* ho* to

control each part of this ne* body. This is a superficial description of

the transmutation e&perience" *hich obiously defies a customary

understanding of reality.

$9E I,PO:$6+CE O2 CO+2I(E+CE

3 crucial factor in deeloping phase abilities is self%confidence in

the ability to use the s!ills. +nitially" these abilities are absent becausethe human brain" tuned in to ordinariness" bloc!s confidence in the

ability to do anything unusual. 3s soon as strong confidence is

reached in the performance of phase abilities" all others become easyto achiee.

3lthough confidence in phase abilities may gro* strong"

practitioners should remain soundly a*are that abilities in the phaseare limited to the phase. 3ttempting tele!inesis" pyro!inesis" or

transmutation in the real *orld is a *aste of time and energy.

CO+$:O<<I+ P6I+

3long *ith all the positie e&periences and sensations that may be en'oy in the phase" painful e&periences nature may also manifest.

Punching a *all in a deep phase state *ill cause the same pain as if a

*all had been struc! in physical reality.

6ome actions in the phase may unaoidably cause unpleasant

feelings of painJ therefore" it is necessary to !no* ho* to aoid

painful actions. Focusing on an internal confidence that pain *ill not



result from an action *ill alleiate the problem. 3 practitioner may

e&periment *ith this type of focus by pummeling a *all *hile

resoling that there is no pain. +f the e&periment succeeds" then

obtaining the same result *ill neer again re4uire the same leel of

effortJ thin!ing that the phase is painless *ill suffice.

,O:6< S$6+(6:(S I+ $9E P96SE

From the ery beginning" it should be understood that the moral

compass of phase space has nothing in common *ith the properties

and la*s in the physical *orld that promulgate reality. The phase

space seemingly imitates the physical *orld *ith all its propertiesand functions only because *e are used to perceiing it and are note&pecting anything else. Moral principles and rules apply only to the

place *here these hae been. +t does not ma!e sense to follo* the

same rules *hile in the phase.

The practitioner should not refrain from certain actions in the

phase because some *ould be unacceptable" improper" or bad in the

real *orld. These are merely behaioral patterns that are unfoundedin the *orld of the phase" *here eerything operates on the basis of

entirely different la*s.

The only moral rules that might e&ist in the phase are those that the

practitioner establishes. +f desired" complete" unhindered freedom

may be e&perienced.

S$U(YI+ POSSIBI<I$IES 6+( SE+S6$IO+S

oice practitioners should not immediately rush to*ards a single

specific goal if long%term practice is desired. +t is better to

e&tensiely inestigate the phase and its surroundings before

focusing on accomplishment. This *ill build intimacy *ith the

e&perience and allo* unhindered entry and interaction *ith the

phase. 3s in reality" learning *hateer first reeals itself is the !ey to

increasing and speciali?ing !no*ledge. 3 beginning practitioner



should at first en'oy the simple fact of actually being in the phase"

then lean its details and functions. Once inside the phase" a

practitioner should e&plore it" e&amining and interacting *ith

eerything encountered.

8e should also try to fully sharpen all the possible feelings in the phase in order to fully understand ho* unusual the phase is in its

realism. 3 practitioner must e&perience moement/ *al!ing" running"

'umping" flying" falling" s*imming. Test the sensations of pain by

stri!ing a *all *ith a fist. The simplest *ay to e&perience taste

sensations is to get to the refrigerator and try to eat eerything that

you find there" at the same time not forgetting to smell each item.

0al! through the *alls" translocate" create and handle ob'ects.E&plore. 3ll these actions are ery interesting in and of themseles.

The possibilities really are infinite. 8o*eer" only *hen they are

*ell understood and thoroughly e&plored can it be said that the

practitioner really !no*s *hat the phase is about.

$YPIC6< ,IS$6>ES WI$9 P:I,6:Y S>I<<S

•0hen trying to discern *hether or not a phase is intact" a 'udgment is based on a similarity to the departed physicalenironment. +n the phase" physical attributes are simulations.

•8yper%concentrating on an ob'ect for too short a time *hile trying

to determine *hether the surroundings are in the phase or in the

physical *orld.

•9eliberately attempting to end the phase prematurely *hen the

entire natural length of the phase should be ta!en adantage of.•Panic in case of paralysis instead of calm" rela&ed action.

•Refusal to practice the phase because of fear" though this problem

is temporary and resolable.

•Opening the eyes at the initial stages of the phase since this

fre4uently leads to a foul.

•Premature attempts to create ision in the phase" *hereas

separating from the body and deepening should occur.



•E&cessie haste *hile creating ision although in the ma'ority of

cases ision appears naturally.

•0hile concentrating on the hands to create ision" doing so at an

e&cessie distance ersus the recommended four to si& inches.•Forgetting about the techni4ues for #maintaining$ *hile in

contact *ith liing ob'ects.

•Forgetting to shut the eyes or defocusing ision *hen

translocating through *alls or other solid ob'ects.

•9esiring to do something superhuman in the phase *ithout the

re4uired internal desire and confidence.

•Fear of e&periencing pain in the phase instead of learning to

control it.•Obsering moral standards in the phase *hen they do not apply.

•3 tendency to immediately use the phase for something practical

instead of first thoroughly e&ploring and interacting *ith the

surroundings.


=ue&tion&

1. 3re there s!ills in the phase that must first be mastered beforethe phase may be used to its full e&tent

-. +s it possible to understand *hether a phase is intact by

attempting to fly

:. 8as a practitioner most li!ely gotten up in the phase or in

reality if there are doubts about this

<. +s it sufficient to thin! about the body in order to return to it"and is it only re4uired to return into the body in order to control

it

=. 0hich arm should be actiely and aggressiely moed to

oercome sleep paralysis

>. +s it possible to tell 'o!es to oneself to oercome sleep

paralysis@. +s it possible to moe the physical eyes *hile in the phase



A. 0hat should be done if sleep paralysis cannot be oercome

B. an sleep paralysis occur *ithout practicing the phase

1C. 0hat if fear is not addressed and con4uered

11. +s it possible to gradually master the phase in order to

oercome fear1-. +s there cause for fear of anything in the phase

1:. 3t *hat point can ision be created in the phase by opening

the eyelids and not through the use of special techni4ues

1<. 0hat *ould happen *ith an attempt to open the eyes after

sitting up in bed" i.e." before becoming completely separated from

the phase

1=. 0hy may contact *ith liing ob'ects in the phase cause areturn to the body

1>. 0hat problems might occur if a practitioner studies the mouth

of a tal!ing ob'ect

1@. +n the phase" ho* 4uic!ly can small te&t be read

1A. 0hich is easier to read in the phase/ te&t in a ne*spaper orte&t on a large billboard

1B. +s it possible to see hieroglyphs instead of te&t *hile reading

in the phase-C. +s it possible to burst through a *all after running up to it *ith

the eyes shut

-1. 0hich muscles of the body must be tensed to start flying inthe phase

--. 3re there any e&trasensory abilities that are inaccessible in the

phase

-:. an a practitioner transform into a ball *hile in the phase-<. 8o* does pain in the phase differ from pain in the physical

*orld-=. 6hould a practitioner gie up a seat to an elderly person *hile

in the phase

->. 9ue to moral considerations" *hat is prohibited in the phase

$a&"&



1. 9uring your ne&t phase session" *al! around your home

inestigating the rooms" !itchen" and bathroom in detail.

-. 2earn to pass through *alls. ompletely dedicate one long

phase e&perience to perfecting this s!ill.

:. 2earn to fly in the phase.<. 0hile in a deep phase" learn to control pain by hitting a *all

*ith your fist.

=. 0hile in the phase" learn tele!inesis (the ability to moe

ob'ects by thought) and pyro!inesis (setting ob'ects on fire" also

performed by thought).

>. 9edicate a lengthy phase e&perience to an e&periment *ith

ision/ create it if it is not already aailable" and then shut youreyes and recreate ision. 9o this at least ten times oer the course

of a single phase

@. 5et ob'ects in the phase to start tal!ing.

A. 9edicate a long phase to searching for different !inds of te&ts

in order to e&periment *ith reading arious si?e fonts.



Chapter - $ran&lo!ation and 2inding O34e!t&

$9E ESSE+CE O2 $:6+S<OC6$IO+

6+( 2I+(I+ OBGEC$S

2i!e eeryday reality" the phase space cannot be used for certain purposes if it is not !no*n ho* to moe around and find necessary

things. +n a *a!eful state" it is more or less !no*n *here something

is located and ho* to reach it. +n the phase the same assumptions

cannot apply since phase mechanisms *or! by different principles.

The reason for addressing translocation and finding ob'ects in thesame chapter is because both techni4ues rely on the same mechanics

that ma!e the e&istence of these techni4ues possible. +n other *ords"

the same methods % *ith minor e&ceptions % can be applied to bothtranslocation and finding.

3fter studying the techni4ues described in this chapter" a

practitioner in the phase *ill be able to go to any location and find

any ob'ect. The only limitations that e&ist are those of the

imagination and desireJ if these are unlimited" so are the possibilities.

Regarding translocation" attention should not be focused on

methods for traelling through nearby spaces. For e&ample" a practitioner may simply *al! into an ad'acent room" or out to the

street ia the corridor or through the *indo*. These are natural" easyactions. 3 practitioner should instead concentrate attention on ho* to

moe to remote destinations that cannot be 4uic!ly reached by

physical means.

+t is important to mention the necessary safety procedures for

translocation. 6ometimes" due to a lac! of e&perience" a practitioner

may mista!e the phase for reality" and reality may be mista!en for the



phase. Mista!ing the phase for reality implies no danger since a

practitioner simply beliees that an entry attempt *as unsuccessful.

8o*eer" if reality is mista!en for the phase" a practitioner may

perform dangerous or een life%threatening actions. For e&ample"

after getting out of bed in a *a!eful state" thin!ing that eerything ishappening in the phase" a beginner may approach a *indo* and 'ump

out of it" e&pecting to fly" as is customary in the phase. For this

reason alone" shortcuts to flight should only be ta!en after gaining a

leel of e&perience that ma!es it possible to unambiguously

distinguish the phase from a *a!eful state.

+f a glitch occurs *hen practicing translocation techni4ues (for

e&ample" landing in the *rong place)" a practitioner should simplyrepeat the techni4ue until the desired result is obtained. Either *ay"

initial training is a must in order to ma!e eerything easier for you

later on.

3s far as ob'ect%finding techni4ues are concerned" these are used

for both inanimate and animate ob'ects. +n other *ords" thesetechni4ues are e4ually effectie for finding" for e&ample" a person or

a utensil. 8o*eer" there are seeral techni4ues that are only suitable

for finding liing ob'ects.

B6SIC P:OPE:$Y O2 $9E P96SE SP6CE

3ll methods for controlling the phase space stem from a primary

la*/ the degree of changeability of the phase space is inersely

proportionate to the depth of the phase and the stability of its ob'ects.

That is" the deeper and more stable the phase" the more difficult it isto perform something unusual in it because in a deep" stable phase"

the la*s of it begin to closely resemble those of the physical *orld.



longer on the table" then after opening the eyes" the practitioner *ill

find that the pencil has disappeared. +n essence" *hen the pencil is

lying on the table and the practitioners eyes are closed" and the

pencil is not being held" no perception is being inested in the pencil"

*hich the practitioner deletes using autosuggestion.

sing certain techni4ue%related methods" a practitioner may causethe stability of the phase state to remain in flu& using techni4ues that

best suit the practitioners indiidual personality.

$EC9+I=UES 2O: $:6+S<OC6$IO+

$ran&lo!ation through $eleportation

This is one of the simplest and most accessible techni4ues that

beginners should use right a*ay. To apply it" shut the eyes (if isionis present)" and then concentrate attention on a thought%form or image

of a location else*here in the phase. 3t this moment" there *ill be a

string sensation of s*ift flight and *ithin t*o to 1C seconds" the

destination *ill be reached.

The success of this techni4ue depends on a strong concentration

upon a single goal/ the desired location. Practice must be performedery clearly" confidently" aggressiely" and *ithout distractions. 3ny

unrelated thoughts hae a profoundly negatie influence on the



performance of this techni4ue. They unnecessarily prolong the flight"

cause a foul" or result in arriing at an undesired location.

$ran&lo!ation through a (oor

+n order to use this techni4ue" approach any door *ith the strong belief that it leads to the re4uired location. 3fter opening the door"

the practitioner *ill see and be able to step into the destination. +f the

door *as originally open" it must be completely shut before applying

the techni4ue.

3 dra*bac! to this techni4ue is that its practice al*ays re4uires a

door. +f there is no door" users of this translocation techni4ue should

create one using an ob'ect finding techni4ue.

$ran&lo!ation through $eleportation 8ith the Eye& Open

This techni4ue is difficult because it re4uires an unstable phase

space caused by a strong desire to translocate to another location.

9uring teleportation by teleportation *ith eyes shut" the practitionerdisengages from the current location. 0hereas during teleportation

by flight *ith eyes shut the practitioner disentangles himself from the

current location" that is not the case here. Therefore" this techni4ueshould be used only by e&perienced practitioners *ho are confident

that they are capable of remaining in the phase.

3s far as implementing the techni4ue is concerned" the practitionersimply needs to stop and concentrate on the thought that he is already

present in the desirable location and focus on its image. +t is

important to not stare at or touch anything during the thought.

6urrounding space *ill dim" blur and then disappear during this time"and then the intended location *ill gradually start to appear. The rate

of space metamorphosis depends on the degree of desire to reach there4uired location.

+f concentration is *ea! or phase depth is poor" then after space

destabili?es" it may not be restored % and a return to the *a!eful state

*ill occur.

$ran&lo!ation 8ith Clo&ed Eye&



This is one of the easiest techni4ues. To use this techni4ue" the

practitioner simply needs to shut the eyes and hae an intense desire

that" *hen the eyes are ne&t opened" the re4uired location *ill be

reached. +n order to considerably increase the effectieness of this

techni4ue" it *ould be useful to imagine" at the moment you closeyour eyes" that you hae already reached the desired location.

Translocation must occur then" and it has to happen *ithout the flight

sensations that occur during teleportation *ith closed eyes.

Translocation must occur right then" and it has to happen *ithout the

flight that occurs in teleportation *ith closed eyes" *hich must be

aoided.

$ran&lo!ation 3y Con!entration on a :emote O34e!t

To perform this techni4ue" the practitioner should peer from a

distance at a minor detail of the desired location. The greater an

intention to see an ob'ects detail" the 4uic!er the arrial at the

ob'ects location. 3 dra*bac! to this techni4ue is that this type of translocation is

possible only for places that are already isible" albeit from a great

distance.

$ran&lo!ation during Separation

The simplest *ay to translocate is to do so *hile separating fromthe body. Employing this techni4ue is e&tremely simple and ery

conenient. +t may be combined *ith almost any separation

techni4ue and is performed by focusing on the image and feel of a

desired location during the initial stages of e&iting the body. +t is een better to imagine that phase entry *ill occur and separation *ill

complete in a chosen location.

Interesting fact!

%fter having changed his place of residence, the

practitioner &ill very often continue for so$e ti$e

to separate fro$ the "ody in the sa$e house &here

he &as used to doing this previously(



OBGEC$ 2I+(I+ $EC9+I=UES

$e!hni%ue of $ran&lo!ation

3ll translocation techni4ues are also applicable to ob'ect finding

techni4ues since the use of both techni4ues re4uires altering thesurrounding the space. +nstead of concentrating on a location" the

practitioner is to focus on the specific detail of a space that is to be

found or changed. 3s a result" finding the necessary ob'ect (proided

this techni4ue has been mastered) is guaranteed" but maintaining the

original location *here the action begins is not guaranteed.

+f the goal is to find an ob'ect *hile remaining in the present

location" use the speciali?ed techni4ues described later on/ techni4uesthat change only a portion of the phase space.

2inding 3y Calling a +ame

This techni4ue is only used to find liing ob'ects. The practitioner

must call a person or an animal by name to cause the animate phaseresident to enter or appear nearby. The call should be loud" nearly a

shout" other*ise it *ill not al*ays *or!. 5enerally" it is often enough

to pronounce a name seeral times to achiee results. +f the desired animate ob'ect does not hae a name or the

practitioner does not !no* it" then any name or general summoning

*ill do" li!e" #ome hereH$ This should be done *hile mentallyfocusing on a clear image of the desired person or animal.

2inding 3y In%uiry

To perform this techni4ue" approach any person in the phase andas! him (or her) *here to 4uic!ly find a desired ob'ect. 3n accurate

ans*er is usually gien straight a*ay" and it should be follo*ed.8o*eer" to aoid *asting time" do not forget to mention that the

ob'ect must be found #4uic!ly$" or specify that the ob'ect should be

#nearby$. 9uring this communication" under no circumstances should

there be a doubt about the accuracy of the information" since

other*ise it may lead to a simulation of *hat is e&pected.



The dra*bac! of this techni4ue is that it re4uires the presence of

an animate person and good s!ill at communicating *ith ob'ects in

the phase" *hich can proe difficult.

2inding 3y $urning 6round

+n order to use this techni4ue" the practitioner must concentrate

and imagine that the re4uired ob'ect is located some*here behind his

bac!" and after turning around he *ill actually see it there" een if it

*as not there 'ust a moment earlier. This *or!s best if the

practitioner" prior to turning around" did not ie* the place *here the

ob'ect is e&pected to appear.

2inding 6round a Corner

0hen approaching any corner" concentrate and imagine the

re4uired ob'ect is 'ust around the corner. Then" after turning the

corner" the ob'ect *ill be found. 3nything that limits space isibility

may be regarded as a corner. This does not hae to be the corner of ahouse or another type of buildingJ it could be the corner of a

*ardrobe" the corner of a truc!" etc.

The dra*bac! of this techni4ue is that it re4uires the aailabilityof a sufficiently large corner that bloc!s the ie* of anything around

the other side of it.

2inding in the 9and

This techni4ue is" in essence" only applicable to finding ob'ects

that can fit in or be held by the hand. To perform this techni4ue"

concentrate on the idea that the ob'ect is already in hand. 3t thatmoment" the practitioner must not loo! at it. 6oon after beginning to

concentrate on this idea" the practitioner *ill at first feel a slightsensation of the ob'ect lying in his hand" follo*ed by a full sensation

and appearance of the desired ob'ect.

2inding 3y $ran&mutation

This techni4ue distorts the phase space *hile not completely

disengaging a perception of the space. The practitioner must gie



=. 8o* may one translocate across ery short distances

>. 0hen the flight techni4ue by 'umping out of a *indo* be

attempted

@. 0hat should be done if translocation and ob'ect finding

techni4ues do not yield the re4uired resultA. +s it possible to find a person from real life using the

techni4ue of finding ob'ects

B. 9oes the stability of space decrease in a deep phase

1C. 0hat are the fundamental components of space and ob'ect

stability

11. 8o* large is the role of auditory perception in the stability of

space1-. 0hat is most important *hile using a teleportation techni4ue

1:. 0hat does speed of moement depend on during

teleportation

1<. 6hould a noice apply the techni4ue of teleportation *ith

open eyes1=. 0hat techni4ue might the translocation *ith closed eyes

techni4ue turn into

1>. 6hould large or small details be scrutini?ed *hiletranslocating by concentration on remote ob'ects

1@. +s the techni4ue of translocation during separation applied

after separation or *hile beginning to separate1A. 0hen applying the techni4ue of translocation through a door/

is it better if the door is open or closed

1B. 0hy might translocation by passing through a *all fail

-C. 0hen using translocation by diing" is it important to be in a place *here there is something to stand on

-1. 0hile applying the techni4ue of rotation" should rotation beimagined or real

--. +s it possible to use a translocation techni4ue to attempt

finding ob'ects

-:. 0hen using the techni4ue of calling by name" *hat should be

done if the name of a desired person in the phase is un!no*n



-<. 0hile loo!ing for an ob'ect using the method of in4uiry" is it

important to specify that the ob'ect needs to be found #4uic!ly$

-=. 8o* far bac! must a turn occur *hen the techni4ue of finding

ob'ects by turning is being used

->. 0ould the corner of a fence be suitable for applying thetechni4ue of finding ob'ects around the corner

-@. +s it necessary to shut the eyes *hile using the transmutation

techni4ue

$a&"&

1. 9edicate the ne&t three phases to e&periments *ithtranslocation techni4ues" using all of them and traelling

*hereer you *ant.

-. 3fter e&periencing three phases dedicated to translocation"

select the techni4ues that *or! best for you.

:. 9uring the ne&t phase" trael to the Eiffel To*er" to theMoon" and to the homes of some of your relaties.

<. 9edicate the ne&t three phases to e&periments *ith the full

range of techni4ues for finding ob'ects" including translocationtechni4ues.

=. 3fter three phases dedicated to finding ob'ects" select the

techni4ues that you are most comfortable *ith.>. +n the ne&t phase that you e&perience" find your mother" and

then at the same location locate this te&tboo!" a red globe" and a

green rose.



Chapter 15 - 6ppli!ation

$9E ESSE+CE O2 6PP<IC6$IO+S

2O: P96SE S$6$ES

Phase perception initially causes so much emotion and ariety ofe&perience that the practitioner is often not concerned *ith the

4uestion of ho* the phase might be purposefully used. The critical

4uestion of application becomes een more critical as e&perience

increases. 3pplication of the phase becomes more iid against the

bac!ground of understanding ho* the phenomenon can proide ameans of gaining information and ne* e&periences.

6ome approach the phase practice *ith a predetermined goal"

uninterested in anything else. 0ith a specific goal" a problem mayarise in the origination of the goal because the phase phenomenon is

*rapped in a thic! layer of pre'udices and stereotypes" *hich often

hae no bearing on the reality. The primary purpose of this chapter isto precisely separate reality from fiction. +ts second purpose is to

proide a detailed description of *hat may be obtained from the

practice of phase e&periences.

Eery proen and accessible practical application of the phase is based on three 4ualities/ a) application founded on the phases ability

to simulate any ob'ect and any space *ith any properties andfunctionsJ b) application based on the opportunity to connect *ith the

subconscious mind in order to obtain informationJ c) application

based on the phases ability to impact a practitioners physiology.

Most importantly" nothing described in this chapter is difficult to

achiee. 3ny application may be achieed during the ery first phase

if a practitioner manages to focus and apply the appropriate



techni4ues for translocation or finding ob'ects. Regardless of *hether

the practitioner adheres to a mystical or pragmatic *orldie*" a full

range of access is inherently possible.

Possible applications of the phenomenon certainly e&ceed the

scope of descriptions related through this chapter. +t is possible thatother applications simply hae not been proen yet" and" so far" the

correct methods of practicing these un!no*n. Only the practitioner

may determine the limits of possibility *ithin the phase. Of course"

common sense should be applied" or it *ould be logically and

psychologically difficult to disengage misconceptions. The goal of

this chapter is to provide a real though $ini$al) foundation that is

fir$ and unyielding, &hatever the circu$stance( f the practitioner follo&s a strict approach to practice, it &ill "e $uch $ore difficult to

"eco$e lost during further practical and theoretical studies(

6PP<IC6$IO+S B6SE( O+ SI,U<6$IO+

Many *onder about the nature of the phase state in relation to the

brain" i.e. *hether or not the phase is all in ones head. 7ut in the

conte&t of applying the phase" this is not a alid concern. Perceptionof the entire physical enironment is performed through sensory

organs. +n the phase" perception is the same" sometimes een more

realistic. 0hether eerything described in this chapter occurs inreality or is merely simulated ma!es no difference in terms of the

encountered sensations.

$ra?elling• %round the &orld' +t is possible to reach any point of the

planet" and it is particularly interesting to reisit places *here the

practitioner once lied or isited" and isit places that the practitioner

has a strong desire to isit. Eery sight and beauty of the Earth

become accessible" be it the Eiffel To*er or an island in Oceania" the

Pyramids of Egypt" or 3ngel Falls.

• Through Outer Space/ 3lthough human!ind is not going to

reach Mars any time soon" any practitioner may stand on its surface



and e&perience its uni4ue landscape through the use of translocation

in the phase. There is nothing more ama?ing than obsering gala&ies

and nebulae" planets" and stars from the antage pint of ast space. Of

all phase applications aailable" this one proides practitioners *ith

the most stri!ing aesthetic e&periences.

• To different places in ti$e' This ma!es it possible to isit a

childhood" to see *hat a person *ill loo! li!e in the futureJ a

pregnant *oman in the phase may see *hat her child *ill loo! li!e.

Trael far bac! in time and *itness the construction of the Pyramidsat 5i?a" see Paris in the 1@th century" *ander among the dinosaurs of

the urassic period.

• Through different &orlds' Trael a *orld that has beendescribed in literature or 'ust inented by the practitioner" deelopedin the imagination. These could be e&traterrestrial ciili?ations"

parallel *orlds" or unierses from fairy tales and films. 3ny

destination is nearby.

En!ounter&

• 5ith relatives' 6ince relaties cannot al*ays see each other"

there is the remar!able possibility to meet each other and tal! in the

phase. Of course" this does not entail mutual presence. +t is enough

for one person to possess the re4uired desire % the second person may

neer een !no*. Reali?ing the desire to contact a close relatie ande&change information is a treasure.

• 5ith ac4uaintances' ircumstances often preent seeing

people *ho are important. This is an opportunity to reali?e a desire

and finally meet that certain person again.• 5ith the dead' Regardless of the nature of the phase

phenomenon" nothing else yields the possibility to see" tal! to" and

embrace a deceased loed one. These are iid" personal e&periences"

accessible to eeryone" and achieing these encounters does notre4uire ma'or difficulty. ourage is the only necessity. From a

techni4ue%related point of ie*" a stable phase and application of the

finding ob'ects techni4ue sets the stage for *hat at first may seem

impossible. +t should be noted that *hen a deceased person is



encountered in the phase" the distortions caused by the ob'ect finding

techni4ue may lead to some ery undesirable occurrences. +f you are

interested in this sub'ect" you should carefully study the guideboo!

:ontact &ith the 3eceased (author/ Michael Raduga).

• 5ith cele"rities' Through the use of ob'ect finding

techni4ues" a practitioner has the opportunity to meet any famous

person. This could be a historical persona" a contemporary politician"

or an artist. +n the phase state" they are all accessible for any type of

interaction. For e&ample" a practitioner could meet ulius aesar"esus hrist" apoleon" hurchill" 6talin" 8itler" Elis Presley"

Marilyn Monroe" and a great many others.

:ealiHing (e&ire&

• Eeryone has dreams. Regardless of *hether they eer come

true in reality" they may at least en'oy be reali?ed in the phase. 6ome

dream of a isit to 2as ;egas" some to drie a Ferrari" some isit

Outer 6pace" others *ould li!e to bathe in a pile of money" and some

desire se&ual e&periences. 3ll of these may finally be e&perienced in

the phase.

6lternati?e to the @irtual World

• +n the phase" young men may participate in game battles as if

the battles are real. 3 practitioner can isit unusual *orlds and places*hile en'oying completely realistic sensations" feel a *eapon in his

hands" and een the smell of gunpo*der. +f desired" een the

sensation of battle *ounds may be e&perienced. 5aming possibilities

in the phase are not limited by the po*er of a microprocessor" but thee&tent of a practitioners imagination.

Creati?e (e?elopment

• :reating &or+s of art' sing the methods of ob'ect finding or

translocation" an artistic practitioner can purposefully see! an ob'ect

in the phase that may be composed in real life. +f necessary" it is possible to easily return to study an ob'ect in the phase. For e&ample"

a painter may find a stunning landscape and puts it to canas in the



real *orld *hile periodically returning to the same landscape in the

phase.

• ie&ing future co$pleted &or+s of art' +f an artist is in the

process of reali?ing an idea" then a preliminarily loo! at the end resultof a design may be seen in the phase. 3 painter can e&amine a

painting in adanceJ a sculptor may see a completed sculpture" and an

architect *ill be able to *ander through a house that is still in the

early stages of design. 3ny creatie *or! can be simulated in the

phase.

• % source of inspiration and fantasy' The phase practice

imparts ideas and desires that positiely affect creatie endeaors.

Furthermore" the reali?ation of desires and traels through unusualspaces eo!e great emotions" *hich proide e&cellent inspiration.

6PP<IC6$IO+S B6SE( O+ CO+$6C$

WI$9 $9E SUBCO+SCIOUS ,I+(

3ssume that the phase state is 'ust an e&ceptionally unusual state

of brain and that perception *ithin it is no more than an unusuallyrealistic play of its functions. 3ssume that a practitioner in the phase

decides to trael to a forest. To do so" the translocation *ith closed

eyes techni4ue is used" and" as a result" a forest appears.

0hat happens if the ision contains ery detailed !no*ledge of

forests" *hat forests consist of" and *here forests originate The

brain creates a hyper%realistic space superior to that of eerydayreality" consisting of millions of blades of grass" leaes" hundreds of

trees" and a multitude of sounds. Each blade of grass has depth and build" not 'ust a point. Each leaf also consists of component parts. 3

uni4ue" natural pattern ma!es up the bar! of each tree.

6uddenly" a *ind begins to blo* through the forest" and millions

of leaes and blades of grass" follo*ing a mathematical model of the propagation of air masses" begin oscillating in a *aeli!e fashion.

Thus" a certain resource inside us is capable in mere seconds not only

of creating millions of details in the desired scene" but also to control

each of those details indiiduallyH



7ased on the pragmatic e&planation of the nature of the phase as

an unusual state of brain controlled by the subconscious" it may be

assumed that the amount of information obtained in the phase is

limited. +f the phase e&ists *ithin the confines of the brain" then the

brain can only operate on data that has been receied by the brainoer the course of its e&istence. +ndeed" it appears that eerything perceied through the sensory organs is remembered and correlated

*ith other dataJ this obseration concern conscious and unconscious

perception.

+f any eent is actually a conse4uence of other eents" *hich

*ere" in turn" also conse4uences of preious happenings" then

nothing occurs by chance. The initial data is !no*n % then it is

possible to calculate *hat is implied by it. 3s a result" if eerything is based solely on the resource of the

subconscious mind" then information may be obtained about

eerything that is related to an indiidual life/ the practitioners

e&periences and the e&periences of those *ith *hom the practitioner

e&periences life. 2essons are learned from the future and past" and thefuture and past of others. 3ll in all" in order to approach !no*ing the

*hole of the information aailable in the phase" personal !no*ledge

capacity *ould need to increase by 1CC or een 1"CCC times.



The only information that is not aailable in the phase is that

about *hich the subconscious mind does not hae any preliminary

information. For e&ample" *here to purchase a *inning lottery tic!et

that *ill *in millions of dollars cannot be learned since there is no

data that could support the necessary calculation. The subconsciousmind *ill also not be able to sho* the practitioner *hat a random

street in a small to*n on the other end of the Earth loo!s li!e. 3

practitioner should not try guessing *hat information the

subconscious mind has to offer and *hat it doesnt because mista!es

are easily made. For e&ample" if a practitioner has neer been to Paris

and neer seen the Eiffel To*er" it might be assumed that the

practitioners subconscious mind !no*s nothing about it either"although through oer the course of life" the mind has already

receied an enormous 4uantity of information from pictures"

photographs" stories" ideos" boo!s" and so forth.

There are three basic techni4ues for obtaining information in the

phase. Each of them has its adantages and disadantages that must be studied and learned before use.

6nimate O34e!t& $e!hni%ue. To perform this method of obtaining information" the practitioner"

in a full deep phase" must locate a person by techni4ues for finding

ob'ects and procure the necessary information from that personthrough the use of simple 4uestions. +f the re4uired information is

lin!ed to a certain person" then that person should be located in the

phase. +f the information is not related to anyone in particular" then it

is possible to create a uniersal information source" *hich must beassociated *ith *isdom and !no*ledge. For e&ample" this could be a

*ise recluse" a *ell%!no*n philosopher" or a guru. The adantage of this techni4ue is that it is easy to pose additional

4uestions and it is also easier to erify *hateer information is

obtained. 3 dra*bac! of this techni4ue is that" for many" it is difficult

to communicate *ith liing ob'ects in the phase because of ob'ects

unresponsieness or a practitioners problems *ith maintaining the

phase *hile tal!ing *ith ob'ects.



Inanimate O34e!t& $e!hni%ue.

se techni4ues for finding ob'ects in order to locate information

from sources li!e inscriptions" boo!s" or ne*spapers. 0hile trying to

locate the source of information" remember to concentrate of a beliefthat *hat is found *ill hae the desired information. 6ource types are

not limited to paper mediaJ een radios or teleisions may be

*atched or listened to" and computer search engines and file systems

also may produce results.

3 huge dra*bac! of this techni4ue is that considerable

complications arise if an additional or a follo*%up 4uestion emerges"

*hich may cause the practitioner to hae to stop and repeat thesearching process.

The upside to this techni4ue is that if a practitioner has problems

communicating *ith animate ob'ects" this techni4ue can temporarily

sere as a reasonable alternatie.

Epi&ode $e!hni%ue.

+n order to receie information using this method" imagine an

eent or series of eents that *ill communicate the desiredinformation. Then" moe to the area *here predetermined eents are

e&pected to ta!e place by using translocation techni4ues. 3fter

arriing at the destination" use isual obseration to understand *hatis ta!ing place and the information that the eents are

communicating. The episode techni4ue is suitable only for cases

*here information can be obtained by obseration.

0o& to verify the infor$ationG The techni4ues for receiing

information in the phase are not comple& in and proe successfulafter 'ust a fe* attempts. 8o*eer" as *as already mentioned earlier"

the properties of phase spaces that do not fall under the category of

iid perception are not particularly stable % not only in terms of

appearance" but also in terms of their properties. orrectness of

information also depends on the ob'ects themseles. The problem



rests in that the practitioner may not be able to properly control the

ob'ect in 4uestion and may receie false information.

Interesting fact!

The phase space is not everyday reality@ therefore,

it should not "e treated &ith the nor$al "elief thatevery o"servation should "e regarded as fact(

Een *hen a practitioner has learned to find animate and

inanimate ob'ects *ith an absence of doubt" there is still no guarantee

that the receied information is al*ays accurate. 3 fe* techni4ue%

related tric!s are able to test an ob'ects ability to spea! the truth.For e&ample" an ob'ect can tal! about something *ith absolute

confidence" but that does not mean that *hat it communicates is all

true. +f doubt is e&perienced *hile finding the ob'ect" then doubt may

hae an effect on *hat the ob'ect says. This is *hy doubt must be

aoided at all costs % although beginners are bound to initially hae problems *ith this.

To determine *hether an ob'ect is able to gie accurate

information" a control 4uestion should be as!edJ a 4uestion that thesubconscious mind cannot !no* the ans*er to. For e&ample" a

practitioner might as! a found ob'ect/ #0here can + buy the *inning

lottery tic!et for the Mega 7all 'ac!pot$ +f the ob'ect startsans*ering such 4uestions seriously" going into great detail" then the

ob'ect should be created ane* since its properties allo* the

possibility that it *ill lie. 3 proper ob'ect *ill remain silent or say

that it does not !no* the ans*er to the control 4uestion. 3fter accurate information is obtained through the use of a control

4uestion" it must be confirmed. This is done by means of a clarifying

4uestion. The practitioner needs to as! the ob'ect *here the

information came from to find out the details that offer proof of the

informations authenticity in the real *orld. The ob'ect may also be

as!ed the same 4uestions more than once" proided they are

re*orded. The ans*ers to re*orded 4uestions must be identical.



Remember" the more important the nature of the information and

the more serious action it implies" the more effort needs to be

inested in erifying it in the real *orld since a certain percentage of

the information is bound to be incorrect despite correct performance

of information%related techni4ues.

6PP<IC6$IO+ B6SE(

O+ I+2<UE+CI+ P9YSIO<OY

There are three main elements that" *ith the help of the phase"

may influence the physiology in ery beneficial *ays. First" it is

possible to contact the subconscious mind to learn ho* to influence physiology. 6econd" the brain reacts more strongly to sensations than

to real eents. For e&ample" if running *hile in the phase" the

physical processes of the body *ould be consistent *ith the

processes occurring in the body of a person running in reality/

respiration accelerates" blood pressure increases" the heartbeat4uic!ens" and een blood flo* to the feet becomes greater. Third"

*hile the practitioner e&periences profound changes of consciousness

in the phase" this is *hen all direct and indirect forms ofautosuggestion are most effectie.

ot all influences on physiology are 1CCK effectie. 8o*eer"

een *ithout a guaranteed rate of success" the effort to influence physiology is *orthy of attention because ama?ing results can be

obtained. 3l*ays remember that achieing a good result may re4uire

repeated influence from the phase. Een in the physical *orld"

medications re4uire repeated ingestion. +f the goal is to cure a disease" do not rely solely on the phase.

6ic! persons must use the phase alongside treatment from physicians.The more serious the illness" the more strongly this rule applies.

O3taining Information

The diagnosis of health problems may be performed *ith the

same techni4ues used for obtaining information. +t is also possible to

learn methods to cure health problems" if such methods e&ist. 7oth of



these possibilities apply to third parties being helped by efforts in the

phase. +nformation gathering is the only proen *ay to influence the

physiology of other people by using the phase. For e&ample" it is

possible to find a *ell%!no*n healer in the phase and as! about

personal health problems or the problems of a friend or familymember. 3 clarified ans*er may be used in the assistance of

traditional medical treatment.

6ttention from (o!tor&

Find a doctor in the phase by using the techni4ue of finding

ob'ects and as! the doctor to ta!e e&amine or treat a !no*n illness or

other health problem. For e&ample" in case of abdominal pains thedoctor may palpate the belly" apply pressure to arious points" and

perform a special massage. 3ny actions are possible" including an

operation. 3fter leaing the phase" the practitioner *ill feel a positie

result.

$a"ing medi!ine&

The placebo effect is much stronger in the phase than in reality

since all actions occur in a highly modified state of consciousnessand are perceied directly. Ob'ect locating techni4ues may be used to

find medications used to treat e&isting problems. +t is also possible to

create self%made substances to produce the desirable effect. Fore&ample" in case of an acute headache in reality" a practitioner may

ta!e a pain!iller *hile in the phase and its effect *ill be partially felt

in the *a!eful state.

(ire!t Effe!t

3n illness or problem may be directly affected by actions in the phase. For e&ample" a sore throat may be *armed by enisioning a

burning sensation in the throat or by moing to a hot location" li!e a

sauna. +f a practitioner *ould li!e to increase physical fle&ibility"

then stretching in the phase *ill cause the body to ad'ust to the

none&istent action by rela&ing and tensing the corresponding tendons

and muscles.



Programming

This is nothing more than normal autosuggestion or auto%training

in the phase" *hich is more potent in the phase than reality. 3

practitioner should repeat a desired goal silently or aloud and" if possible" should imagine e&periencing the desired result. For

e&ample" if the aim is to get rid of depression" a practitioner should

attempt to recreate a happy mood in the phase" e&periencing it to the

fullest e&tent possible. 6imultaneously" silent repetition of a goal *ith

complete understanding and e&pectation that eerything *ill be

alright" that eerything is *onderful *ill undoubtedly produce the

desired effect.

U&eful eperien!e&

Eerything *ith useful properties in reality should be e&perienced

as useful in the phase since the body *ill react in practically the same

manner. seful e&periences may include e&ercising" going to thegym" haing a massage" ta!ing mud or salt baths" and e&periencing

pleasant emotions.

P&y!hology

Practicing phase%related techni4ues faorably affects the

psychology because it offers ne* opportunities and eo!es ne*emotions. 8o*eer" there are specific applications of the phase that

produce differing psychological effects. For e&ample" it is possible to

use the phase space as a bridge for dealing *ith phobias by

facilitating a setting *here a practitioner may confront and deal *ithcertain fears. ;arious comple&es may be defeated in a similar

manner. The use of a *ell%!no*n techni4ue called re%isiting(recapitulation)" *here a person re%e&periences aderse eents *hile

trying to relate to them in a ne* *ay" has been used successfully in

the phase.

$raining



3ny motor s!ills can be sharpened by using it in reality and in the

phase because the algorithm of rapid physical action is generated at

the leel of interaction bet*een areas of the brain that correspond to

muscle action. +n the phase" *restlers may practice thro*s" !arate

fighters may practice punches and !ic!s" and gymnasts may practiceacrobatics. 8aing enough time to practice these actions in the phase

is another matter.

U+P:O@E+ E22EC$S

People often approach the practice of arious phase states *ith

deep%rooted misconceptions about *hat can actually be achieedthrough practice. Eerything listed in this section refers to these

misconceptions. +t has not been proen that any of these things is

impossibleJ ho*eer" actions should be based on proen and erified

methods in order to aoid ma!ing mista!es and *asting time.

Ehysical e#it' +f the first e&perience *ith the phase phenomenonhappens by accident" it is almost impossible not to interpret it as a

real separation of the soul from the body I a physical e&it. This is

ho* the initial phase e&perience really feels. 0ith e&perience it becomes easily noticeable that certain things in reality do not match

things in the phase" li!e the placement of ob'ects or furniture in the

house *here a phase is first encountered. o actual physical e&it from the body has eer been proen

through scientific e&perimentation and obseration. For e&ample" in

the phase" it is not possible to fly around to locations in physical

*orld" although it may seem so" the locations that are e&perienced are produced *ithin the mind. or is it possible to pinch someone in the

phase and then to find a bruise on the person *hile in reality. Other &orlds' The phase space is similar to the physical *orld"

and a practitioner may be inclined to thin! that the soul has left the

body. 6ometimes the phase ta!es on an absolutely unnatural form. 3s

a result" the practitioner may decide that a parallel *orld has been

entered/ the *orld beyond" the astral plane" mental space" or the

ether. 3lthough trael in the phase can lead to many places" this does



not mean that the phase allo*s trael through or use of actual"

alternate *orlds. The practitioner should be reasonable.

3evelop$ent of super-a"ilities' +t is partially correct to consider

the practice of the phase as an e&trasensory ability since it is an actual

deelopment of e&tremely unusual s!ills that hae al*ays beenconsidered mystical. Times hae changed" and the phase should

hardly be shuttled off to the esoteric" obscure corners of !no*ledge.

There e&ists an unproen theory that the practice of the phase can

impart unusual abilities. 0hile literature is full of references to this

effect" these abilities hae not yet been proen by anyone. The same

applies to intentionally deeloping unusual abilities in the phase. es"

these may be trained *hile in the phase" but this does not mean thattraining in the phase *ill yield the same results in the real *orld.

Practice should not be for the sa!e of achieing super%abilities since

there are many proen applications that do translate to reality in

aluable *ays. 7e realistic.

USE O2 $9E P96SE BY $9E (IS6B<E(

0hile practicing the phase may still be ie*ed by the ma'ority asentertainment or an element of self%deelopment at best" phase

practice ta!es on a *hole ne* meaning for the physically disabled.

For them" the phase may be the only place *here the handicaps ofreality dissole and disabled practitioners e&perience a range of

possibility greater than the life e&perienced in reality.

3 blind person *ill see again in the phase" een more clearly than

seeing people do in reality. 6omeone *ho is paraly?ed *ill be able*al!" run" and also fly. 3 deaf person *ill hear the murmur of

streams and the chirping of birds. For the disabled" the phase practiceis a chance to discoer ne*" incomparable *orlds free of physical

limitation.

aturally" there are some nuances that must be understood. First"

for e&ample" if a person *as born blind" then there is the 4uestion as

to *hether or not they *ould be able to see in the phase the same *ay

ordinary people see. 8o*eer" this issue has not been fully studied"



and blind people should simply carry out their o*n independent

research. 6econd" some types of disabilities can negatiely affect the

practice of the phase states. For e&ample" people *ho hae gone

blind hae greater difficultly catching the intermediate state bet*een

sleep and *a!efulness since" unli!e seeing people" they may a*a!en*ithout opening their eyes to the perception of sound. Third" a purely

psychological disability plays an enormous negatie role.

Psychologically disabled people hae a *hole range of specific

beliefs and attitudes that may present an obstacle for them.

0hateer the indiidual issues" this particular area of phase

applications re4uires additional study. +t deseres significant

attention because it is a alid tool for the rehabilitation of thedisabled. +t is *or!able" uni4ue" and e&tremely surprising in terms of

the e&periences that it offers.

$YPIC6< ,IS$6>ES

W9E+ USI+ 6PP<IC6$IO+S

•3ttempting an applied use of the phase *ithout reaching a good

depth. 9eepening must al*ays be performed before applications areattempted.

•7eing so inoled in phase applications that #maintaining$

techni4ues are forgotten.

•Forgetting to consider ho* to breathe *hen traeling through

Outer 6pace or under*ater" *hich may lead to asphy&iation.

•oncentrating on a certain ob'ect *hile traeling through time

instead of concentrating on time trael" *hich should be the focussince it is the point of performing the applications.

•Forgetting techni4ues for #maintaining$ *hen animate ob'ects are

encountered *hen these techni4ues must al*ays be !ept in mind.

•3n inability to oercome fear during contact *ith deceased

people. This fear must be oercome once and it *ill neer resurface

again.

•2imiting desires *hile practicing the phase. There is no limit to

desire *ithin the phase.



•2imiting the performance of certain actions" although there are no

customary norms of behaior in the phase" unless the practitioner

decides upon specific limits.

•0hile loo!ing for information in the phase" attempting to obtain!no*ledge *hich clearly e&ceeds the scope of the subconscious

mind.

•3pplying the techni4ue of obtaining information from animate

ob'ects *ithout !no*ing ho* to communicate *ith them.

•Forgetting to chec! the ability of an ob'ect to coney alid

!no*ledge. The probability of bad information is much higher if it is

not erified.

•Failing to erify information in the phase before using it inreality.

•Forgetting to erify serious information obtained in the phase in

reality before using it. ;erification absolutely must be performed to

aoid using bad information in reality.

•3 single attempt to influence the physiology through the phase. +n

the ma'ority of cases" results are gained through repeated effort.

•3n attempt to cure some disease only using the phase" *hereas it

is compulsory to see! medical adice.

• +nitially belieing that the phase is the e&it of the soul from the

body" *hile this is easily refuted in practice.

•oncentrating only on unproen applications" despite all the

eidence out there that this is most li!ely a *aste of time.


=ue&tion&

1. 0hat are the three basic applications of the phase-. 3re proen practical phase applications accessible to any

practitioner

:. 0hile in the phase" is it possible to actually trael through

3frica<. +s it possible to *al! on the moon in the phase



=. +s it possible" *hile in the phase" to appear at the time of the

Earths creation

>. +n the phase" is it possible to appear in the magical *orld

behind the loo!ing glass

@. 0hich relaties can be met in the phaseA. +s it possible to meet and tal! to your faorite actor in the

phase

B. 0here can one reali?e any cherished dream

1C. an a practitioner appear in the computer game 3oo$

11. an a musician use the phase for creatie purposes

1-. 9oes the practicing the phase influence a persons

imagination1:. 0hat most probably goerns the phase space

1<. 0hat !ind of information is obtainable in the phase

1=. 0hile in the phase" is it possible to find out *here the lost !ey

to an apartment is located

1>. 0hat !ind of people can discoer *here treasure is hidden inthe phase

1@. 6hould any information obtained in the phase be construed as

accurate1A. 6hould information obtained in the phase be erified after

*a!ing up" een if its already erified in the phase

1B. 6hould obtaining information occur before deepening has been performed

-C. To obtain information *hile using the animate ob'ects

techni4ue" *ho should be tal!ed to if the goal is it to find out the

thoughts of a boss at *or!-1. 8o* might information from an animate ob'ect be obtained

--. an an inscription on a *all be used as an inanimate source ofinformation

-:. +s it possible to use the episode techni4ue to learn *here one

has lost the !ey to ones apartment

-<. 6hould a doctor be consulted before trying to cure a disease

through phase practice



-=. 3re results from influencing physiology in the phase al*ays

1CCK guaranteed

->. 0hat phase techni4ues might be used to influence the bodies

of other people

-@. +s it possible to obtain information that can be used toinfluence the body and its functions

-A. +s it possible to ta!e a *ell%!no*n pain!iller in the phase and

feel its effects on e&it

-B. +s it possible to use autosuggestion in the phase

:C. an athletes use the phase to deelop their s!ills

:1. +s it realistic to e&pect to the soul *ill e&it the body *hile

practicing the phase:-. +s it possible to enter a parallel unierse through the phase

::. 6hould a practitioner hope to deelop super%abilities in the

phase

$a&"&

1. ;isit the Pyramids of 5i?a in the phase. Meet your faorite

singer and trael to your dream house.-. 0hile in the phase" find a *ise person *ho is an authority on

matters of the phase and learn from them *hat entrance

techni4ues *ill best suit your practice.:. Try to perceie heat throughout the entire body by

translocation to a sauna or through auto%suggestion.

<. 2earn to moe ob'ects by simply staring at them in the phase"

and appreciate the e&tent to *hich this s!ill is reflected in reality.



Part III

6uiliary Information

Chapter 11 – U&eful $ip&

6 P:6,6$IC 6PP:O6C9

The only sure *ay to get practice *ithout unnecessarily *asting

time is to hae a pragmatic and rational approach to the nature and

possibilities of the phase phenomenon.

The ma'ority of aailable information regarding dissociatie

phenomena is inaccurate. This becomes obious during initial entriesinto the phase. This is *hy practice should begin from the

perspectie of a clean slate" using a logical bearing in thin!ing/

everything not confir$ed "y personal e#perience should "e ta+en&ith a grain of salt( This means only personal e&perience should be

ta!en seriously" not the e&perience of ac4uaintances" authors"

teachers" blogs" or forums. To err is humanJ thus" it is also human to pass on errors. 3s a

result" many parado&ical old *ies tales concerning the phase

phenomenon hae become accepted a priori.

ot eerything *ritten in esoteric literature should be thro*n out.6ome things may possibly be dra*n from it. 3fter reading such

literature" a practitioner should not assume that the ne* !no*ledge isa uniersal truth.

For a house to stand firm" it needs a solid foundation. The only

*ay to build a good foundation phase practice is to approach the

phenomenon in a do*n%to%earth manner" from a scientific

perspectie" discounting any purported supernatural phenomena.



Once a solid foundation has been established" eeryone has the right

to build their o*n truth on it.

I+(EPE+(E+$ 6+6<YSIS

+f a practitioner is only interested in haing phase e&periences"

then the simple treatment of this guideboo! and other materials may

suffice. 8o*eer" if a practitioner *ants to achiee the best results"

ample focus must be gien to indiidual thought and formation of

opinion based on personal analysis.

ntil all 4uestions are ans*ered through a search for ans*ers in

arious sources of information" no real progress should be e&pected.Many things cannot be described or e&plained. The resolution of

many issues *ill al*ays remain up to indiidual 'udgment and

understanding. Finding all of the ans*ers is impossible. Moreoer"

trying to possess all of the ans*ers is a serious inhibitor to real

progress because the practitioner *ould hae to digress into dubiousliterature and conersation aside from real" formatie practice.

The adice and e&periences of others may lead to error. +n no case

should there be any authorities or unachieable ideals. 3 logical"een s!eptical approach should be ta!en during research and practice.

The goal of this guideboo! is to proide the reader *ith linear"

factual information sufficient for the deelopment of independentanalysis.

Each time a practitioner encounters some incomprehensible

phenomenon or problem *hen performing phase techni4ues" an

independent analysis of the phenomenon should be formed beforeloo!ing else*here for the cause. +f a see!er loo!s for ans*ers outside

of personal reasoning" there is a high ris! of assimilating and actingupon a fallacy.

Many practitioners are not *illing to analy?e personal successes

and failures" and instead search all sorts of boo!s" *hich often

contradict one another" and using a hodge%podge of e&traneous"

unerified information can only lead one to further" and 4uite

infectious" fallacy.



6PP:O6C9 $O <I$E:6$U:E

2iterature of eery sort has al*ays been the main ehicle for

disseminating information about the phase state. The phase phenomenon is referred to by other terms/ astral pro'ection" out%of%

body trael" or lucid dreaming. +n addition to disseminating

information" many boo!s are often ehicles for disseminating

fallacies.

This is easy to recogni?e *hen researching seeral such boo!s

and comparing described eents and theories. The information is

more often than not contradictory and based on opinions that haeneer been erified by anyone" including the authors. The result is a

mass of speculation that has no bearing on reality" nearly al*ays

accompanied by a false certainty about the sub'ect matter. 8o*eer"

unli!e the real *orld" the phase is not a place *here one can beliee

ones eyes or feelings. The phases appearance and 4ualities dependery much on the person e&periencing it.

For e&ample" if a practitioner beliees upon entering the phase the

body *ill be lying nearby on the bed" then it *ill al*ays be there. +f a practitioner beliees that the perceied body should al*ays be

tethered to the physical body" then in the practitioner *ill al*ays see

and een feel a tether in the phase. This is a simple case ofe&pectations becoming reality. 6imilarly" someone *ho has entered

the phase by accident and thin!s that the time of death has arried

may see angels and a tunnel *ith a light at the end. +f someone is

e&tremely religious" there may be a perception that something holy"een 5od" has appeared. +f entry to the phase is construed as a result

of being abducted by aliens" then that is e&actly *hat *ill happen. This *ould all be 4uite funny if it *ere not actually encountered.

0hen it occurs" the only thing left to do is to beliee. To beliee" to

tell others about it" and *rite boo!s about it...

There are authors *ho impart no illusions" but it is often difficult

for a noice to separate the truth from illusion or open fabrication"

*hich is *hy a s!eptical approach to the contents of any boo! is



*arranted. The only truth coneyed in any boo! is that *hich has

been erified by personal e&perience. The rest should simply be

noted and possibly ta!en into consideration.

+n conclusion" boo!s should be studied to discoer techni4ue%

related information that allo*s a practitioner to enter the phase andcontrol the e&perience. This is the only point of intersection among

all beliefs and theories.

P:6C$ICE E+@I:O+,E+$

6ince techni4ues used to enter the phase are associated *ith a

specific type of mental operation" it is necessary to createcomfortable conditions so that e&ternal distracters are !ept to a

minimum. 3 room should neither be too cold or too hot" nor too

bright. Performing techni4ues at a comfortable temperature in a

dar!ened room or *hile *earing a sleeping mas! are *ays to

promote unhindered practice. +nterfering noises are often also ma'or distracters and isolation

from such noises is necessary to successful practice. +t is often

sufficient to turn off the phone and close doors and *indo*s. +f thisdoes not help" or if it is e&tremely loud outside the *indo*" one can

use standard earmuffs.

+t is also helpful to gie adance notice to people so that they arenot alarmed. +t is also preferable that no one is in the bed *ith the

practitioner. Most often" domestic animals interfere *ith the

performance of techni4ues" *hich is *hy they should be fed

beforehand and !ept out of the room *here direct or indirecttechni4ues are practiced.

$6<>I+ WI$9 <I>E-,I+(E( PEOP<E

5reat benefit is deried by discussing personal e&periences *ith

other practitioners. This leads to an e&change of information" ne*

!no*ledge" and mutual help concerning certain problems and issues.



The greatest effect comes through communication in person" and

not solely through mail" forums" and blogs. Meeting face%to%face *ith

li!e%minded people promotes camaraderie and a useful

!no*ledgebase to consider during indiidual practice.

9ue to the fact that !no*ledge of the phenomenon isunderdeeloped" difficulties may arise in finding someone to tal! to.

This can be soled by personally sharing phase e&periences *ith

friends and family members" regardless of *hether they are fello*

practitioners. +t is een better to pass on training literature" li!e this

guideboo!.

The *ebsite www.obe4u.com also has a discussion forum deoted

to the phase" ma!ing it possible to obtain and e&change a largeamount of information. The site also has the contact information for

the coordinators of Phase Practitioner lubs all around the *orld"

*hich is a non%commercial association of enthusiasts *ho meet to

e&change and discuss e&periences.

$9E :I9$ W6Y $O >EEP 6 GOU:+6<

Deeping a 'ournal can be of much help *hile learning and practicing the phase. 0hen properly !ept" a 'ournal can help a

practitioner to deelop an analysis that *ill increase the 4uality of

phase e&periences. 7y and large" !eeping a 'ournal helps to iron out asporadic practice" turning it into a structured discipline that can be

mastered.

3n effectie diary should contain a massie amount of indicators

that allo* a statistical study to uncoer patterns. +t is essential thateach entry include the date" time of day or night" a detailed account of

entries into the phase and phase e&periences. 9escriptions ofmista!es and a plan of action for the ne&t phase should also be

recorded. 9uring the noice stages of practice" een noting

unsuccessful entry attempts is beneficial. 2ater on" only successful

phase e&periences may be recorded.

8ere is an e&ample of a proper 'ournal entry/





(ataD

#perience /o( 12

January 6th , 2H

2'88 EM Eperien!eD

&o+e up early in the $orning( %fter e#ercising, too+ a

sho&er and ate "rea+fast( &atched T and read "oo+s until

lunch(

laid do&n for a nap at 1 EM, right after lunch( felt li+e

perfor$ing indirect techni4ues, and affir$ed this intention(

&o+e up the first ti$e to $ove$ent, "ut after trying to e$ploy forced falling asleep in order to negate the effects of the

$ove$ent), fell asleep( &o+e up the second ti$e &ithout

$ove$ent and tried to roll out( This didn.t &or+ and tried

levitating and getting up( %fter that, $oved on to phanto$

&iggling( Move$ent occurred in $y right hand( %fter doing

this for several seconds, decided to try listening in( Sounds started, "ut &as una"le to $a+e the$ louder( 0o&ever,

i$ages appeared "efore $y eyes and started to vie& the$( %fter they "eca$e realistic, decided to try rolling out and it

&or+ed &ithout a hitch(

My vision &as di$, as if through a veil( But then, the rest

of the sensations felt reached the verge of reality( This is&hen &ent to the &indo&( For so$e reason, it &as su$$er

outside, and not &inter( There &as a red fire-truc+ outside the

&indo&( There &ere really lo& clouds in the s+y( The sun &asa"ove the$(

/e#t, everything 4uic+ly faded a&ay and found $yself

"ac+ in $y "ody( Then, got up and loo+ed at the ti$e( t &as2'16 EM(

,i&ta"e&D

1( 5hen the phanto$ &iggling &or+ed, should have

aggressively tried to increase the range of $ove$ent, and not



si$ply done &iggling, let alone change to another techni4ue(

%fter all, if &iggling occurs, the phase can al&ays "e entered(

2( The sa$e &ith the sounds( had no great desire to a$plify

sounds or even listen in( verything &as done lac+adaisically(

8( should have started &ith deepening and not actions, as

visual sensations &ere not vivid( I( should have e$ployedtechni4ues for $aintaining( 6( ou can.t loo+ do&n for long

&ithout si$ultaneously using techni4ues for $aintaining, yet

too+ in everything outside the &indo& and in the s+y( K(

forgot a"out the plan of action( L( should have tried again to

enter the phase(

Plan of a!tion for net timeD

1( 3efinitely deepen the phase as $uch as possi"le( 2(

should try to go through a &all( 8( Translocate to $y %untie

in /e& or+( I( Translocate to the Statue of i"erty and

e#a$ine her cro&n( 6( Try to conduct the e#peri$ent of

putting $y hand into $y head(



Chapter 1# – Pra!titioner&7 Eperien!e&

$9E SI+I2IC6+CE

O2 O$9E: PEOP<E7S EPE:IE+CES

The ability to analy?e the e&periences of others can be a great

supplement to personal training. This allo*s a practitioner to reie*

and thin! through situations that hae not yet been personallyencountered. The more a practitioner analyses the e&periences of

other practitioners" fe*er mista!es *ill be made during indiidual

practice.

Reading the e&periences contained in this section *ill shed much

light on proper phase practice. The actions that these practitioners

too! to achiee results *ill be subconsciously retained by thereaders memory. 2ater" these actions may reproduce similar

circumstances in the phase" affording aluable opportunities to

respond using proper actions.

3t the beginning stages of practice" many practitioners lac! in real

descriptions of phase e&periences *hile techni4ue%related !no*ledge

abounds. Techni4ues can be conceptuali?ed in many different *ays"*hile descriptions of their application are much more demonstratie.

Thus" many practitioners hae no idea about ho* genuine practice

transpires.

The e&periences described in this section are useful % een from a

psychological point of ie*. Een if a person beliees that the phase

phenomenon e&ists" it may be construed as e&tremely difficult or personally impossible. 3fter learning about other peoples

e&periences" a person *ill reali?e that these practitioners hae been



able to enter the phase *ithout any complicated or incomprehensible

techni4ues. The reader *ill understand that the !ey is to ta!e right

actions at the right moment" trying to master the phase *ith calmness

and confidence.

0hile reie*ing and analy?ing other peoples e&periences in thissection" the reader should remember that these e&periences are based

on personal beliefs about the phenomenon" *hich is *hy occult

terminology and notions may be encountered. 8o*eer" such aspects

of the descriptions are not important. Focus should be gien to

techni4ue%related actions described in the accounts. The reader

should also ta!e into account that some nuances (li!e e&periential

realism) are not al*ays clear in the te&t and that it is not al*ays possible to determine *hy certain eents occurred in the phase

e&periences described here.

3ll of the follo*ing descriptions belong to real people *ho either

related the accounts orally" *rote them do*n during classes at the

6chool of Out%of%7ody Trael" submitted them ia email" or postedthem on the forum at www.obe4u.com. Though the total number of

recorded" erifiable phase descriptions e&ceeds one thousand" only

seeral cases that are illustratie and useful for deeloping analysishae been selected. Primarily" these are descriptions of the

practitioners initial phase e&periences" *hich are most releant to

ne* practitioners. The large number of mista!es made by almost eery practitioner"

regardless of their leel of e&perience" should not be ta!en too

seriously *hile reading the comments. 3ctually" it is a rare occasion

that the phase is e&perienced *ithout any techni4ue%related errors.Eerybody ma!es mista!es.

E&periments are listed in ascending order of 4uality and numberof properly performed actions. 3ccounts hae been published *ith

the permission of the authors.






6+6<YSIS O2 SE<EC$E(

P:6C$I$IO+E:S EPE:IE+CES

+o. 1

Bori& Pronya"in

Copy8riter. >ie?J U"raine

&o+e up in the >correct? state( i$$ediately felt vi"rations,

and "efore had ti$e to ti$e to thin+ a"out anything, &as +noc+ed

out of $y "ody "y a strong +ic+( started falling( had no vision, the

floor &as gone( i+e a nose-diving airplane, &as in a free-fall(

+ept dropping faster and faster( started to feel that &as losing

control( The only thing could do &as increase the speed &ith &hich fell, all of the &ays that occurred to $e to try $aintain the phase

that atte$pted at that $o$ent only lo&ered $y degree of

a&areness( Touching did not do anything for $e, as &as ust an

une$"odied spirit in a co$plete vacuu$( ision &as also $issing(

started to panic due to the i$$inent foul( But the acceleration of the

fall did not help either, and &as flying and &aiting for the $o$ent&hen &ould "e thro&n out into the drea$ &orld( %nd dropped li+e

this until fell asleep(=ue&tion&D 9id 7oris describe a direct or indirect techni4ue

0hat could he hae done if no spontaneous separation had occurred

8o* could 7oris hae more correctly used deepening techni4ues0hy *asnGt 7oris thro*n into a phase episode 0hy did he fall

asleep 6n&8er& and Comment&D 3n indirect techni4ue *as employed.

+f spontaneous separation had not occurred" 7oris could hae tried toseparate on his o*n. +f an attempt to separate had failed" it *ould be

necessary to implement indirect techni4ues by intensifying theibrations" and then try once again to separate. +n order to deepen

and" mean*hile" reach a destination *hile falling" 7oris should hae

applied translocation techni4ues and" upon reaching a location"

continued to deepen by means of sensory amplification. For e&ample"

he could hae applied the techni4ue of translocation by teleportation



*ith his eyes closed or simply tried to catch sight of his hands

through the dar!ness" *hich also *ould hae induced an e&it.

7oris also did not pay any attention to the roar in his ears. +t could

hae been used for the techni4ue of listening in" *hich *ould hae

helped him to deepen and maintain. The lac! of a set aim to landsome*here resulted in his endless fall" though it does not al*ays

happen this *ay. 7oris fell asleep due to his passiity and also

because he forgot that falling asleep *as a possibility" though he did

remember about the possibility of an inadertent return to reality (a

foul).

+o. #6leei Ba"hare?

Engineer. So!hiJ :u&&ia

This &as the first ti$e that $anaged to "eco$e conscious &hile

drea$ing( Before falling asleep, concentrated on the dar+ness

"efore $y eyes and tried to re$ain consciousness as long as could(

%ll of a sudden, drea$t that &as levitating to the ceiling, &hichresulted in $y "eco$ing conscious that &as drea$ing( My phanto$

"ody responded poorly to atte$pts to control it, and si$ply hovered"eneath the ceiling( There &ere t&o people sitting on the floor "elo&(

They &ere loo+ing in $y direction, "ut it see$ed that they did not see

$e( %t this point &o+e up and felt so$e sort of tingling and itching

in $y legs( =ue&tion&D 0hat factors led to the entry into the phase through

dream consciousness 0hat needed to be done *hile hoering about

beneath the ceiling 0hy did the foul happen so fast 0hat shouldhae been done immediately after returning to the body 6n&8er& and Comment&D 9ream consciousness occurred due to

the 3le&eis intent to concentrate on the space before his eyes and his

desire to remain conscious for as long as possible. The process of

becoming conscious *as caused by the sensation of flying *hile

dreaming. Flying almost al*ays becomes an anchor for dream

consciousness. +mmediately after the phase occurred" 3le&ei should

hae started deepening. +nstead" he simply hoered about and



obsered. 0hile all the moements may hae been difficult to

perform" they should hae neertheless still been done ery actiely.

3s a result" lightness and a deepening of the phase *ould hae

ensued. 8is inadertent e&it from the phase happened due to

passiity" failure to deepen" and non%compliance *ith the rules formaintaining the phase. Een upon returning to his body" 3le&ei

should hae tried to separate again.

+o. '

(mitry ,ar"o?

:adio ,e!hani!. ,o&!o8J :u&&ia

My first ti$e &as the $ost terri"le event in $y life( had nevere#perienced such terror( t happened in 3ece$"er, 1!!( &as

falling asleep in $y "ed at ho$e( Suddenly, heard so$eone enter

$y roo$, "ut did not pay attention to the >intruder?( Then, t&o

fe$ale hands gra""ed $e fro$ "ehind, and &hile pressing $y "elly,

started to lift $y "ody up( distinctly felt thin fingers &ith long nails

on $y "elly, "ut &as co$pletely paraly*ed and a"solutely una"le$ove any part of $y "ody or put up any +ind of resistance( felt $y

"ody go through the ceiling, "ut then &as pulled still higher andhigher(

got scared that this could "e death( &as afraid not so $uch of

death as of the un+no&n( %ll of this happened so s&iftly that found

$yself unprepared for such a crossover( started to pray( as+ed;od to help $e free $yself and go "ac+( panic+ed( can.t say ho&

$any seconds $y forced levitation lasted or ho& high &as lifted

a"ove $y house, "ut the $o$ent ca$e &hen instantly returned to$y "ed( =ue&tion&D 0as this entry into the phase deliberate 0hat !ind of

techni4ue led to the phase 0hat is the name for the complete

immobili?ation that 9mitry encountered 0hat should he hae done

in order to start moing 0hy did his body easily go through the

ceiling 0hy *as he able to stop this terrible e&perience by praying

0hat could he hae done immediately upon returning to his body



6n&8er& and Comment&D This phase e&perience *as

spontaneous and falls under the category of direct techni4ues since

there *as no significant lapse into sleep. The *hole e&perience *as

accompanied by sleep paralysis" *hich is *hy it *as difficult for

9mitry to do anything. +n order to moe in this type of situation" it*ould hae been necessary to intensify the phase state by using an

indirect techni4ue or redouble efforts to moe.p

9mitrys body *ent through the ceiling *ithout any difficulty

because there *as no ision and the phase itself had not been

deepened" other*ise this *ould not hae happened so easily. Praying

and appealing to 5od helped in this case because praying facilitated a

rela&ation of perceptions and an intention to go bac! to reality/ t*ofactors *hich are crucial during emergency return techni4ues. pon

returning to his body" he could hae still tried to separate again"

though this *ould hae been easier said than done due to the fear

associated *ith the first e&perience.

+o. )

I?an Ya"o?le?

Student. 6nt8erpJ Belgium don.t +no& &hat &o+e $e up, "ut +ne& right a&ay that

so$ething &as out of order( could not open $y eyes, and $y "ody

&as al$ost ust as+ing to rise up( understood &hat &as going on N

all of this indicated that &as having an out-of-"ody e#perience( The first thing tried &as to lift $y left hand up, and it &or+ed(

understood that this &as an astral hand, "ecause could see through

it( $oved hastily and carefully to the other side of the "ed There&as a strange sensation in $y head at that ti$e)( cal$ed do&n and

tried to do so$ething again( levitated a"out half a $eter a"ove the

"ed( ision ca$e "ac+ to $e right then and sa& &hat appeared to"e $y roo$, "ut not e#actly it, as the rug on the floor &as of a

different color pattern and the door &as closed for so$e reason(

could not co$prehend &hy everything &as lit fro$ "ehind $y "ac+(

Then, loo+ed over $y left shoulder and sa& a s$all "right &hite

"all "ehind $y shoulder "lade at a distance of H inches( t &as



lighting up the roo$ up( Then tried to go through the door, "ut &as

una"le to( Out of the fear that &ould never return to $y real "ody,

&o+e up in the everyday &orld( =ue&tion&D 9uring the beginning of his e&perience" *hat

phenomenon typical to the phase and a*a!ening did +an encounter0hat !ind of techni4ue" direct or indirect" led to the phase 0hat

specific techni4ues *ere employed 8o* could the sensation of #the

body 'ust as!ing to rise up$ hae been used 0hat should hae been

done immediately *hen he reali?ed that it *as possible to raise his

hand 0hat should hae been the first actions ta!en after leitation

0hy *as it unnecessary to immediately try to go through the door

0hat should hae been done *hen +an returned to his body 9oesthis practitioner hae a do*n%to%earth ie* or an esoteric ie* of the

nature of this phenomenon 6n&8er& and Comment&D pon a*a!ening in a state of sleep

paralysis" +an understood that he could use this opportunity for the

phase and immediately started attempts to separate *ithoutemploying techni4ues for creating the state" as they *ould hae been

superfluous. This *as an indirect techni4ue by nature. 8e could hae

follo*ed his impulse to leitate from the ery beginning instead ofmoing his hands. 3fter his hand started to moe" he could hae

stood up or separated. +nstead" +an simply rolled oer and calmed

do*n for an instant" although doing so is strongly discouraged and isa *aste of the progress made up to this point. Then" after starting to

leitate" he should hae" first of all" assumed a position distinct from

that of his real body" stood up on the floor" and immediately started

deepening. +nstead" he dierted his attention to the light source and anattempt to go through the door.

Een if eerything had been done correctly from the beginning"there *ould hae been no reason to attempt to go through the door.

+an could hae simply opened it. The s!ill of going through ob'ects

should be learned after first fine%tuning the ability to deepen and

maintain the phase. There *as no reason to return out of fear" but

een a return to the body" another immediate attempt at separating

*ould most li!ely hae been successful.



The use of the term of #astral hand$ indicates that the practitioner

harbors esoteric ie*s on the sub'ect.



+o. *

+atalya >oHheno?a

Engineer. Sh!hel"o?oJ :u&&ia

5hen &as a"out 1L or 1H years old, read so$e esoteric

articles on astral proection( They see$ed 4uite interesting to $e, "ut

no $ore than a curiosity N did not particularly "elieve in suchthings(

One evening, &ent to "ed as usual( &o+e up in the $iddle of

the night, "ut &as una"le to $ove $y "ody and there &as a loud

noise in $y head( 0aving "een re$inded of those articles, si$ply

tried to levitate and $anaged to do so, as if through $y forehead

so$eho&( The sensation of flying &as very realistic, to $y great surprise( The first thought that occurred to $e &as, 5o&, these

astral guys &eren.t lying? hovered a"ove $y "ody for so$e ti$e in

the dar+( thought of vision, and it started to appear( then fle&

to&ards the &indo&, and upon turning around in to face $y "ody,

sa& it in its proper place( decided to fly "ac+ to it and touch it(

5hen finally po+ed it, it suc+ed $y "ac+ into it, causing a 4uite strange sensation(

=ue&tion&D 0hat type of techni4ue did atalya use 0hat *ouldshe hae needed to do if her attempt at leitating had been

unsuccessful 0hy *as the phase short%lied 0hat should she hae

done upon returning to her body 0hy did she use the term #astral$0ere the articles about astral pro'ection of any significant help

6n&8er& and Comment&D pon a*a!ening in a state of a sleep

paralysis" atalya stumbled upon the idea of employing indirect

techni4ues. 6he managed to separate immediately" but if shedencountered problems in doing so" she could hae started the

techni4ue of listening in to the #noise$ in her head. The phase *asshort%lied due to a lac! of actiity and failure to perform deepening

and #maintaining$ techni4ues. 3fter returning to her body" she should

hae tried to immediately separate.

atalya holds esoteric ie*s on the nature of the phase

phenomenon" *hich is *hy she uses such terminology for it.



$odel( t turned out to "e the first o"ect that tested, as suddenly

&anted very $uch to find out &hat ti$e it &as and chec+ &hich day

of the $onth it &as( distinctly felt the phone in $y hand, "ut upon

atte$pting to concentrate on and loo+ at the display, &as thro&n

"ac+ into the reality( i$$ediately cli$"ed "ac+ out of $y "ody and

decided to si$ply pace around the apart$ent &hile trying tore$e$"er &hat could e#peri$ent on( tried to conure an o"ect,

"ut that didn.t &or+ and resulted in so$e $ental activity( This

caused the phase to fade and $y "eing thro&n "ac+ into reality( n

total, there &ere a"out five successive entries into the phase that

lasted for 2 to 8 $inutes each( The e#periences &ere not sta"le at all,

&hich is &hy &as e#a$ining $y surroundings in a hurry, al&aystrying to get ahold of anything could get $y hand on( 0o&ever,

there &ere a good a$ount of i$pressions, considering that it &as $y

first entry( =ue&tion&D 0hat type of techni4ue did Roman use to enter the

phase 0hat *ere the !ey precursors of the phase 0hich separationtechni4ue *as used +f Roman had failed to completely separate"

*hat techni4ue" besides ibrations" should he hae considered 0hat

is the most li!ely reason for all of the fouls 0hich single actionallo*ed the practitioner to ma!e the phase fie times longer

6n&8er& and Comment&D The phase *as entered through a

direct techni4ue" *ith the comfortable position that Roman *as lyingin being the main catalyst. 3s long as Roman *as lying in an

uncomfortable position" his mind *as unable to completely turn off

physical perception" and this *as most li!ely the reason *hy there

*ere no short lapses in dreaming. +f Roman *ere still unable toseparate *hen using the techni4ue of standing up" or any other

techni4ue besides intensifying the ibrations" he could hae triedlistening in" as there *as some noise.

+nstead of using his first phase e&perience to *or! on mastering

the basic s!ills of deepening and maintaining" Roman immediately

indulged in comple& e&periments" *hich is *hy his multiple entries

*ithin the same phase *ere brief" of poor 4uality" and not used

effectiely. 7ut this is all typical during initial e&periences and a lot



*as still accomplished" especially considering that a direct techni4ue

*as used. The relatie length of the phase *as achieed mainly

than!s to complying *ith the single *ay to maintain the phase I

repeated separation" *hich Roman managed to do fie times.



+o. 0

6leander (yren"o?

Student. ,o&!o8J :u&&ia

My first entry happened at night( &as lying in "ed and thin+ing

a"out the phase, as had "een una"le to fall asleep for a &hile(

do*ed off for a $o$ent and then a&o+e again, this ti$e already inthe proper state, and then easily rolled out $ore or less

unconsciously and refle#ively)( &ent deeper "y $eans of touching

and then falling headfirst( t is a pity that .ve already forgotten a lot

of the e#perience, "ut do re$e$"er that after deepening fell right

do&n onto the yard of $y grand$other.s house, "ut then lost

consciousness, and so returned into $y "ody and rolled out of it several ti$es( &as una"le to sharpen all $y senses' 5hen

deepened one sense touch, for e#a$ple), another i(e( sight) &ould

fade a&ay( %fter that, have a gap in $y $e$ory concerning $y

travels consciousness and lucidity &ere &ea+, and fell asleep and

>resurfaced? several ti$es), "ut re$e$"er having "een to a lot of

places( 0ereAs ho& the episode ended' dove headfirst into &ater fro$ a

high "oard after first having deepened a "it), and then $y sense oftouch gre& sharper' felt >&ater? and hit $y head against a very

soft >"otto$(? resu$ed the interrupted fall through &illpo&er, "ut

then it occurred to $e that $y grand$other &anted to &a+e $e up(

My level of a&areness &as not 4uite ade4uate, as it did not occur to$e that &as actually sleeping in a dor$itory, and not at $y

grand$otherAs house( That.s &hy decided that needed to return to

$y "ody( % sharp fall occurred right after that thought, and &as follo&ed "y sensations si$ilar to those one e#periences &hen hung-

over( =ue&tion&D 0as a direct or indirect techni4ue applied 0hat

made the implementation of the techni4ue successful 0hy *as

3le&ander e'ected into his grandmotherGs yard 0hile deepening"

ho* could the problem of the senses being enhanced only one at a

time hae been soled 0hy did the practitioner hae gaps in his



memory 0hat *ere the main problems associated *ith maintaining

the phase6n&8er& and Comment&D 9espite the brief lapse in

consciousness" the techni4ue used *as a direct one" and that ery

lapse facilitated the immediate emergence of the necessary state" eenthough this *as 3le&anders first e&perience. The e'ection into his

grandmotherGs yard *as spontaneous" and *as most li!ely caused by

some preceding thoughts about the yard or being in a habit of going

there. ne&pected translocation often occurs *hen deepening *hile

falling headfirst.

uite possibly" in order to aoid haing the senses of sight and

touch enhance only one at a time" he should hae simultaneouslyapplied the techni4ues of touching and loo!ing out. 3s for

maintaining the phase" there *ere three main problems that *ere also

direct causes of the gaps in 3le&anderGs memory/ little depth" lac! of

a clear plan of action" and non%compliance *ith the rules for

maintaining the phase (*ith the e&ception of multiple entries afterreturn to the body).

+o. S?yato&la? Barano?

Student. PermJ :u&&ia

&o+e up on $y side( didn.t feel li+e sleeping any$ore, "ut

closed $y eyes any&ay( 5hen lay do&n on $y "ac+, i$$ediately felt the sensation that &as a"out to fall fro$ the couch &as lying

on the edge), and so$e +ind of lapse occurred, as if &as "eing

pulled so$e&here( lay do&n once again, and this "u**ing started,and a green light appeared "efore $y eyes( lay "ac+ even further,

and $y eyelids started to flutter( thought that $ight fall fro$ the

couch at that $o$ent, "ut then $y vision ca$e to $e, and o"servedthat &as already lying on the floor ne#t to the couch got up on $y

feet and noticed that the roo$ &as >spinning? as if &ere drun+, "ut

everything 4uite 4uic+ly &ent "ac+ to nor$al( %t that very $o$ent,

understood that this &as it The phase itself



n ecstasy, forgot a"out all the techni4ues and &ent to loo+

a"out the roo$( verything &as ust li+e in reality, "ut so$e things

&ere out of place( tried to levitate and "ent "ac+&ards, and &as

so$eho& thrust outside( t &as dus+ out there, and there &as a lot of

sno& on the ground( &ent around the house and tried to levitate(

&as a"le to soar up&ards, and sa& the hori*on and sunset( But then "egan to lose altitude( %fter having flo&n to the &indo& on the other

side of the house, &anted to go up to the roof, "ut then a foul

occurred( n a fraction of a second, had the sensation that &as

>no&here?( But then, $y real eyes opened &ith difficulty) and there

&as once again the feeling of so$e sort of lapse( %&areness &as di$

during the phase, apparently due to not having gotten enough sleep( =ue&tion&D 0hat !ind of phase entrance techni4ue did 6yatosla

use 0hich specific techni4ue produced results 0hich separation

techni4ue *as employed +f separation *as unsuccessful" *hich

techni4ue should hae been immediately used 0hich important

actions did he not perform enough after entering the phase 0hatshould hae been done after the foul 0hy *as a*areness dim

during the phase

6n&8er& and CommentaryD 3n indirect techni4ue *asemployed. o phase state creation techni4ues *ere employed by

6yatosla. +nstead" separation immediately *or!ed through rolling

bac!*ards. +f separation *ere unsuccessful" he should hae proceeded *ith obsering images" *hich *ould hae been possible

*ith the green light.

9eepening *as not immediately performed" no effort *as made to

maintain" and there *as no appro&imation of a plan of actionJho*eer" this is not a crucial factor during initial e&periences.

3nother attempt to enter the phase should hae been made uponreturning to the body" but this *as also forgotten. 3*areness *as dim

and memory *as *ea! during the phase because of the initial

shallo*ness of the state" *hich *as reflected in the perception of the

surrounding and also the thought processes.

+o. 15



Oleg Su&h!hen"o

Sport&man. ,o&!o8J :u&&ia

ast night spent a"out an hour developing the interplay of

i$ages in $y $ind after no left felt any feeling of +inesthetic sense(

&as lying on $y "ac+ in an unco$forta"le position( %fter sliding

to&ards sleep for so$e ti$e, felt slight vi"rations and echoes of sounds fro$ the drea$ &orld, "ut the unco$forta"le position still

hindered $e( n the end, thought the hec+ &ith it, and decided to lie

do&n ho&ever &as co$forta"le, and turned over to lie on $y

sto$ach( 3espite the fact that the $ove$ent upset the process, after

a"out five $inutes the state "egan to return and "uild up( &as a"le

to get a little vi"ration this ti$e, although &as una"le to a$plify it( dre& a picture of $y +itchen in $y $ind, and "ecause the i$ages in

that state &ere really vivid, strong, and realistic, after so$e ti$e

understood that not only &ere $y attention and a&areness there, "ut

so &ere $y "odily sensations( &as 4uite surprised that the phase

had "een so easy to fall in to there &as no dou"t that this &as the

phase)( u$ped out through the &indo& and "egan to fly around the

courtyard( %ctually, it &as the first ti$e that had flo&n only upon a single $ental co$$and, &ithout any physical effort, as occurs

during drea$s( The courtyard "ore only 17 si$ilarity to its real-

life counterpart, "ut &as not at all surprised "y this, and si$ply

enoyed it as $uch as could, as &as a"le see and &as noti$$ediately thro&n out( But, after having loo+ed at and ta+en in the

city, the thought of &hether or not this &as the phase and not ust a

lucid drea$ occurred( &as so conscious in the drea$ that &asa"le to +no& a"out and co$prehend such ter$s, and differentiate

"et&een the$ - can you i$agineG have to add that gave little

attention to $y $e$ory, so can.t say ho& $uch of $y >self-a&areness? &as there, "ut &as a&are enough to "e a"le to

differentiate "et&een the phase and a lucid drea$ or at least thin+

a"out the difference)( even &ent and as+ed people around if it &as

the phase or a lucid drea$( Sounds funny, doesnAt itG The funniest

thing &as that they ans&ered that it &as a different &orld, and they



refused to discuss the topic any further &ith $e( Then, decided to

not get $y $ind all $i#ed up and ust go &ith the plot, &hich turned

out to "e 4uite long and uninterrupted recalled a $o$ent fro$ the

day "efore ho& had lain do&n and induced the phase &hile lying on

$y "ac+, and ho& had turned over and flo&n a&ay( recalled all

this periodically during the course of the phase, and reali*ed that should try to as+ a"out &hat had "een going on &ith $e on the foru$

later(

Then, later in the phase, found $yself in a "ase$ent( %s there

&as ust a really nasty s$ell there, decided that had already had

enough and that it &as ti$e to go "ac+( That happened even $ore

easily, as soon as thought a"out going "ac+, a vi"ration as light asa "ree*e &ent through $e and then &as "ac+ in $y "ody &ith full

a&areness and a &ell-rested "ody and $ind( &as co$pletely

refreshed %nd that.s despite the fact that re$e$"er everything,

every second of the drea$, fro$ the $o$ent started flying =ue&tion&D 0hich type of techni4ue helped Oleg enter the phase

0hat initially made it harder for him to enter the phase" and could

this hae had a positie effect on later results 0hat can be said of

techni4ues related to ibrations in the conte&t of OlegGs entry into the phase 0hich specific techni4ue brought him into the phase 0hich

initial actions should hae been ta!en upon entry into the phase

0hat *as lac!ing that could hae lead to productie use of the phase 0as it *orth*hile to immediately translocate by 'umping

through the *indo* 0hat *as the cause of reflection on *hether

the e&perience *as the phase or a conscious dream 0as it beneficial

to try to offhandedly learn from ob'ects *hat type of state this *as0hy did the desire to return bac! to the body arise" and *hat could

hae caused it 6n&8er& and CommentaryD Oleg entered the phase using a

direct techni4ue. 8e *as initially unable to enter due to the

uncomfortable position that he had assumed" although lapses in

consciousness into short dreams did occur. eertheless" the initially

unsuccessful techni4ue still ended in a positie final outcome because

the state that Oleg *as in *as close to the phase. 8o*eer" attention



should not hae been gien to ibration amplification techni4ues"

especially straining the brain and straining the body *ithout using

muscles" as they can be detrimental during direct techni4ues.

The techni4ue of isuali?ation *as used immediately before

entering the phase instead of obsering images" *hich is used moreoften. Oleg deliberately con'ured the obsered images instead of

searching for them in front of himself" *hich is *here the difference

bet*een the techni4ues lies. 8o*eer" he did not perform deepening

upon entering the phase. 3dditionally" he had no clear plan of action

to ensure that the phase *ould be productie 6tarting to translocate

by 'umping through *indo*s should only be done by those *ith a

certain amount of e&perience since beginners sometimes perceiereality to be the phase" or the phase to be reality.

The reason for the reflection on the nature of the phenomenon

*as due to terminological confusion" *hich is 4uite *idespread. +f a

practitioner is a*are but does not feel the body as in the physical

*orld" then it can be assumed that the phase has been entered. This is*hy there *as no reason to in4uire about this among animate ob'ects.

9eliberately returning to the body *as a big mista!e. There *as

no reason to thro* a*ay an opportunity to trael and use the phase.7eginners are not often afforded such an opportunity. The reason for

the return to the body in this case is most li!ely found in the absence

of a plan of action and lac! of clear understanding of ho* the phasemight be used for practical aims.

+o. 11

6leander <ele"o?Computer Programmer. Saint Peter&3urgJ :u&&ia

tried all night to use the %stral :atapult that cues you &hen

you.re drea$ing, "ut gave up on the idea after several unsuccessfula&a+enings and si$ply fell asleep( 5hen A$ drea$ing usually

$ove "y ta+ing great leaps, $uch further than a +angaroo, a"out

1-8 yards( This happens regularly in $y drea$s, and usually

i$$ediately reali*e that A$ in a drea$( 3uring one of the leaps,

reali*ed &hile air"orne that &as drea$ing and also reali*ed that



&anted to coo+ so$ething in $y +itchen( She said that could heat a

frying pan &ithout gas( But instead decided to try the techni4ue of

putting the hands together and "lo&ing on the$, and returned "ac+

into $y "ody( =ue&tion&D 0hich type of the entry into the phase did 3le&ander

describe 0as the cueing program of any help 0hich type of anchor

*as the leaping 0hy *as the onset of consciousness immediately

follo*ed by a transition into the stencil" i.e." the real body" though not

completely 0hich separation techni4ue helped him to get out of his

body again 0hich techni4ue *as used for deepening 0hich

techni4ue for materiali?ing an ob'ect *as used correctly 0hat

should the procedure for obtaining information hae been started*ith 0hat importance does a polite attitude to*ards elderly *omen

in the phase hae 0hy *as the return to body possible 0hat did

3le&ander either forget to do or forget to record right after the foul 6n&8er& and Comment&D 3le&ander described an entry into the

phase through dream consciousness. 7y and large" the onset ofconsciousness *as facilitated by prior *or! *ith the cueing program"

*hich" though it failed to yield results" strengthened the necessary

intention to enter the phase. The leaping that accompanied the onsetof consciousness may be compared *ith the sensations of leitation

that often lead to practitioners achieing dream consciousness. 6ince

the techni4ues for deepening and maintaining *ere not used at themoment of dream consciousness" a return to the body" though partial"

naturally occurred.

Furthermore" 3le&ander managed to apply a separation techni4ue

that most resembled climbing out. 8e then managed to deepencorrectly by means of touching and immediately felt a result. 9espite

the lac! of a plan of action" the practitioner competently decided todo something useful and employed the techni4ue of finding through a

door in order to locate an animate source of information. 8e should

hae first tried to test the sub'ect by as!ing special 4uestions to

determine if the ob'ect *ould be able to proide information (see

hapter 1C).



+o. 1#

Bori& Bender

,o?ie $e!hni!ianJ Eperien!ed Pra!titioner of the Pha&e.

,o&!o8J :u&&ia

"eca$e conscious in $y drea$ al$ost i$$ediately after falling

asleep( &as in $y apart$ent standing in the corridor( Being surprised "y having so suddenly found $yself in the phase, started

to touch the &alls &ith $y hands to test their fir$ness or, realness,

as &ell as to intensify the phase "y touching( entered the roo$(

There &as a "ed standing ne#t to the &all, &ith $y $other sleeping

on it( could not see her face, only her "ody under the "lan+et( The

roo$ and corridor &ere e#act replicas of their real-life counterparts( 5hile thin+ing a"out $y sleeping $other, suddenly started to

feel so$e&hat uneasy( 5hen approached the &indo&, sa& a

grotes4ue landscape "ehind it that &as si$ilar to pictures fro$

$ovies a"out catastrophes' a &asteland, houses in ruins, odd pileups

of "uilding $aterials, sla"s of concrete, gar"age, craters fro$

e#plosions here and there, and noticed hu$an figures in so$e places(

Fearing a foul caused "y the fact that &as ta+ing in a panora$ic vie& the vie& fro$ the &indo& spanned 1H degrees and

cut off at the hori*on, &hich is in fact al$ost e#actly as the vie& fro$

$y apart$ent is in real life), turned "ac+ into the roo$ and started

to touch the &ardro"e, and then +nelt do&n to touch the floor( %ll the&hile, $y fear had "een gro&ing stronger and stronger' "oth out of

thin+ing a"out $y sleeping $other and due to the vie& fro$ the

&indo&( %n#iety turned into real fear &ithin a $atter of several seconds, and then graduated into terror and panic( lost the a"ility

to thin+ critically( had only one thought' had to go "ac+ to $y

"ody( darted "ac+ to $y "ed and suddenly found $yself lying on it( closed $y eyes, "ut could not understand if &ere in $y real "ody

or still in the phase( My terror gre& even stronger &hen half-

opened $y eyes and sa& that $y $other &as getting up fro$ her "ed(

She loo+ed li+e a character fro$ a horror $ovie and apparently &as

hostile to $e(



6n&8er& and Comment&D 0hen e&amining distant ob'ects in the

phase" there is al*ays a ris! of returning to ones body because the

actiity is rela&ing and rela&ation is detrimental to the length of a

phase. 7oris could hae continued to ta!e in the ie* by

simultaneously !eeping up ibrations" periodically e&amining hishands" or rubbing them together. 9uring the entire length of 7oriss

phase" he performed sensory amplification by touching to deepen and

maintain the phase.

+f he tried to run a*ay from his mother to another place in the

phase" she probably *ould hae caught up *ith him there any*ay.

8e should hae tried to yell at her in an aggressie tone. This *ould

hae helped him to oercome his fear and either scare the ob'ecta*ay or ma!e it more agreeable. Problems *ith an emergency e&it

from the phase arose because it *as the beginning of the night and

the mind still needed to dream and" thus" !ept pulling him into that

process.

+o. 1'

6leei $e&len"o

I$ EngineerJ Eperien!ed Pra!titioner of the Pha&e. ,o&!o8J:u&&ia

%ctually, &as not planning to travel that night, "ut &hen &o+e

up around $idnight decided to try to enter the phase nevertheless(

started to perfor$ phanto$ $ove$ents &ith $y ar$s, "ut then a strong sleepy lethargy overca$e $e and suddenly &anted to give

up $y atte$pts to enter the phase and si$ply fall asleep( 0o&ever,

&as persistent and continued to perfor$ phanto$ $ove$ents &ith$y ar$s( nstead of feeling the usual vi"rations that occur &hen this

techni4ue is perfor$ed, si$ply fell asleep and continued the

phanto$ $ove$ents &hile drea$ing( Because of that, $yconsciousness apparently did not fall asleep co$pletely, and

"eca$e a&are that &as drea$ing(

i$$ediately cli$"ed out of $y "ody( There &as no vision,

conscious a&areness &as no $ore than 67, so the phase &as not

that deep( n order to $aintain the phase, i$$ediately started



chaotically touching everything around $e( t helped( ision ca$e,

though it &as $ur+y( then found $yself in $y apart$ent( decided

to strive to deepen( ach ti$e that e#ercised that techni4ue, the

phase "eca$e deeper and deeper( %fter had achieved a sta"le

phase, decided that it &ould "e good to gra" a snac+ and headed

for the fridge( should add that &as on a strict diet at the ti$e and&as craving so$ething s&eet or fried( 0o&ever, &hen opened the

fridge, &as 4uite disappointed( There &as a lot of food in the fridge,

"ut all of it re4uired preparation ra& $eat, fish, dill, etc()( 0o&ever,

there &as a "ottle of spar+ling $ineral &ater on a special lo&er shelf

in the fridge( 5ithout giving it any thought, too+ the "ottle and

started to chug it( %ll of the sensations &ere ust as in real life' felt the "u""les

fro$ the car"onation, that peculiar taste that $ineral &ater has, and

also ho& the &ater &ent do&n $y throat( n general, everything &as

4uite realistic, though there &as no sensation of $y sto$ach filling

up &ith &ater and, $oreover, the &ater felt so$e&hat dry( t sounds

funny, "ut that very feeling of &ater.s dryness spoiled $y overalli$pression so$e&hat( %fter a foul, reali*ed that a possi"le reason

for this $ight have "een dryness in the $outh of $y real "ody(<sually, if there are, for e#a$ple, candies in the +itchen or in the

fridge, actually ta+e a handful of the$ and consu$e the$ &hile

traveling through the phase(

%fter going to the fridge, &anted to see so$ething interesting( decided to e$ploy the techni4ue for creating o"ects and people, and

so closed $y eyes and focused on the i$age of a girl &ho$

&anted to see at that very $o$ent( affir$ed $y desire, and thenopened $y eyes, concentrating on the area to $y side( The air gre&

$isty at first, and then the person &as e#pecting $ateriali*ed out of

the air, and ca$e to life, see$ingly fully autono$ous and &ith free&ill - she had the sa$e $anner of spea+ing as in real life, and acted

in the sa$e &ay( The foul happened &hile $y conversation &ith the

girl &as in full s&ingP =ue&tion&D 0hich type of the techni4ue did 3le&ei ultimately

use 0hy did lethargy and dro*siness arise during phantom



pon returning to his body" he should hae tried to separate

again. 3ltogether" 3le&ei managed to and ma!e progress in t*o

specific" applied tas!s" though did not complete them satisfactorily.

Eer!i&e& for Chapter 1#

$a&"&

Try to assess the e&periences described aboe using the rubric belo*. The ans*ers are located in the appendi&.

*-Point Sy&tem for 6&&e&&ing the =ualityof Out-of-Body Eperien!e& APha&e&

9eliberate entry into the phase using any techni4ue Q1

The phase *orld *as realistic or *as made realistic Q1

Phase *as of aerage or aboe%aerage duration (- minutes or

more)

Q1

9eliberate use of the phase to *or! to*ards a specific goal Q1

9eliberately studying the phase or e&perimenting *ith it *hilein it. Q1

+f there is some doubt any regarding any item" only half a point

should be a*arded.



Chapter 1' - Putting a 2a!e on the Phenomenon

Stephen <aBerge

6tephen 2a7erge *as born in 1B<@ in the

nited 6tates. 3t the age of 1B" he receied a7achelors 9egree in mathematics from 3ri?ona

6tate niersity" after *hich he enrolled as a

graduate student in the hemistry program at

6tanford niersity. +n 1B>B" he too! an

academic leae of absence.8e returned to 6tanford in 1B@@ and began

studying the human mind" including sub'ects

related to dreaming. 2a7erge receied his Ph.9. in psychophysiologyin 1BAC. 8e founded the 2ucidity +nstitute in 1BA@.

6tephen 2a7erge has made the largest scientific contribution to

the study of phase states. +t suffices to say that 2a7erge *as the firstin the *orld to proe during a full%fledged scientific e&periment that

it is possible to become conscious *hile dreaming This *as done

through logging specific signals made *ith the eyes by a person

dreaming *hile sleeping under measurement instruments. Thesee&periments also proed that eye moement in the physical body and

perceied body are synchronous. ucid 3rea$ing " first published in 1BA=" is 2a7ergeGs most *ell%

!no*n boo!. #ploring the 5orld of ucid 3rea$ing, a boo! that

2a7erge *rote *ith 8o*ard Rheingold" *as published in 1BBC. +t

*as mainly than!s to the efforts of 2a7erge that mind%machines for

achieing dream consciousness *ere created" such as 9ream2ight"

oa9reamer" and 9reamMa!er.



The !ey feature of 2a7erges *or! and achieements is an

absolutely pragmatic approach to the nature of the phenomenon.

3rguably" he is one of the fe* authors and researchers totally lac!ing

in irrationality. Eerything that can be read and learned from his

boo!s is erifiable and accessible for eeryone" *ith no peddling ofout%of%this%*orld superpo*ers.

Carlo& Ca&taneda

9ue to arlos astanedas desire to follo* the

spiritual practice of the 0arriors Path" *hich

entails erasing ones personal history" the detailsof his biography are unclear. 3s far as

astanedas early years are concerned" it can only

be stated that he *as born outside of the nited

6tates sometime bet*een 1B-= and 1B:=. 8e

enrolled at the niersity of alifornia" 2os3ngeles (23) in the 1B>Cs" *here he receied a Ph.9. in

anthropology on the basis of his boo!s.

astanedas entire life path *as deoted to studying the teachingsof a certain uan Matus or don uan achora. +t is more than li!ely

that his persona is a composite%image of an +ndian 6haman" a

sorcerer" and an heir of the culture of the ancient #Toltecs$. astaneda *rote a do?en boo!sJ ho*eer" the boo! The %rt of

3rea$ing (1BB:) has the most to do *ith the phase state. +t contains

seeral effectie techni4ues for entering the phase through dream

consciousness. 8is sub'ect matter is soa!ed in a large amount ofmysticism and irtually deoid of any pragmatism.

9espite the fact that the main orientation of astanedas *or! didnot touch upon the phase state" he neertheless became one of the

founding fathers of this field" as his general popularity reached

massie proportions *orld*ide.

arlos astaneda passed a*ay in 1BBA.



:o3ert 6. ,onroe

Robert Monroe *as born in the nited 6tates

in 1B1=. +n 1B:@" he graduated from Ohio 6tate

niersity *ith a degree in Engineering. 8e*or!ed for some time as a radio program

producer and director until he established his o*n

radio company in e* or!" *hich rapidly

e&panded.

+n 1B=>" his company also conducted a study

about the effect of sound *aes on the abilities of

the mind. +n 1B=A" Monroe had an accidental personal e&perience *ith the

phase phenomenon" *hich strongly sto!ed his interest in the sub'ect

to *hich he *ould deote his entire career. +n 1B@<" he founded the

Monroe +nstitute" *hich *as entirely deoted to studying unusual

states of consciousness and the ability to influence them throughaudio stimulation and other technologies. One of its main

achieements *as the creation of the 8emi%6ync system" *hich *as

designed to help a person reach altered states of consciousness"including out%of%body states" by synchroni?ing the t*o hemispheres

of the brain.

8is first boo!" Journeys Out of the Body" *as published in [email protected]*o boo!s then follo*ed/ Far Journeys (1BA=) and <lti$ate Journey (1BB<).

Robert Monroe has" so far" made the largest contribution to*ard

populari?ing the phase state. 8o*eer" he understood the phase moreas an actual e&it of the mind from the body" *hich is *hy the term

#out%of%body e&perience$ (O7E) *as introduced. The boo! Journeys

Out of the Body *as such a massie success that Monroe 4uic!ly

became an undisputed authority in the field.

8o*eer" the large influence of mysticism on Monroes *or! and

ie*s cannot be ignored. This is especially apparent after his second

boo!. The ma'ority of phenomena described in the boo! hae not

been erified in practice. The only attempt at conducting a full%



fledged scientific e&periment proing that the mind left the body *as

unsuccessful. +n the end" typical misconceptions about the phase

became *idespread" as did a*areness of the e&istence of out%of%body

e&periences.

Robert Monroe passed a*ay in 1BB=.

Patri!ia arfield

Patricia 5arfield *as born in 1B:< in the

nited 6tates. From the age of 1<" she !ept an

uninterrupted daily dream 'ournal that *ould allo*

her and all of humanity great insight into dreams phenomena associated *ith the phase.

6he *as one of the founders of The 3ssociation

for the 6tudy of 9reams. 9r. 5arfield holds a

Ph.9. in clinical psychology.

6he is the author of a great number of boo!s" *ith the 1B@< best%seller :reative 3rea$ing being the most *idely lauded. +t *as one of

the first pieces of literature to approach the phase state in a practical

and non%specialist *ay" and receied *orld*ide interest andappreciation. The boo! contains good practical guidelines and also

describes the dreaming practices of arious cultures.

Syl?an ,uldoon

6ylan Muldoon *as born in the nited

6tates in 1BC:. 8e is considered to be the3merican pioneer in the study of the phase"

although he used the esoteric term astral . 8einadertently *o!e up in the phase at the age of

1-" *here he sa* a cord connecting his perceied

body to his real body. Muldoon first thought that

he *as dying during the e&perience" although he

eentually concluded that this *as an instance of

#astral pro'ection$. 8e had repeated e&perience *ith the



phenomenon" but Muldoon *as still unable to become an adanced

practitioner due to a lac! of full control oer the practice.

3fter coordinating efforts *ith 8ere*ard arrington" the famous

3merican inestigator of the un!no*n" the t*o published the

sensational" 'ointly authored boo! The Eroection of the %stral Bodyin 1B-B. The authors published t*o other boo!s/ The :ase for %stral Eroection (1B:>) and The Eheno$ena of %stral Eroection (1B=1).

9espite a large sering of esotericism" Muldoons boo!s"

(especially the first one) contain a lot of helpful" practical information

and e&planation of the most dierse phenomena that can occur during

the phase. 8o*eer" Muldoon is considered to be the greatest

populari?er of irrational esoteric terms and theories" *hichsubse4uently became 4uite *idespread.

6ylan Muldoon passed a*ay in 1B@1.

Charle& <ead3eater

harles 2eadbeater *as born in England in

1A<@ (1A=< according to some sources). 3fter

dropping out of O&ford due to hard times"

2eadbeater became an ordained priest" but then became 4uite actie in the occult. This led to his

becoming a member of the Theosophical 6ociety

in 1AA:. 2eadbeater became one of its most

famous participants.

The combination of a bright mind" scientific

!no*ledge" and interest in the paranormal led himto publish many boo!s on many dierse topics. One of them"

3rea$s' 5hat They %re and 0o& They %re :aused (1ABA)" *as one

of the first *or!s to touch upon the phenomenon of the phase.

2eadbeaters *riting is saddled *ith a ton of esoteric terms and

theories. +n it" the term astral plane is predominantly used for the

phase. eertheless" the boo! is not *ithout some helpful guidelinesconcerning techni4ues.

harles 2eadbeater passed a*ay in 1B:<.



:o3ert Bru!e

Robert 7ruce *as born in England in 1B==.

8e has performed his lifeGs *or! *hile liing in3ustralia. 3fter studying and promoting

dissociatie phenomena for many years" by the

beginning of the -1st century he had become one

of the leading authorities in the field. 8e is also a

specialist in many other paranormal fields of

study.

Robert 7ruce *rote seeral boo!s" the mostimportant and *ell !no*n of *hich is %stral 3yna$ics (1BBB). The

author holds 4uite open esoteric ie*s" *hich are ery strongly

reflected in his theories and terminology. The helpful" practical

guidelines in his boo!s are 4uite often loaded *ith a large amount of

information that has not been erified or proen by anyone. Robert7ruce is also a propagator of typical superstitions and stereotypes

concerning the phase phenomenon.

:i!hard We3&ter

Richard 0ebster *as born in e* ealand"*here he still resides.

8e is the author of about =C publications that

hae sold many millions of copies around the

*orld. 8o*eer" only one of them" %stral Travel for Beginners" is completely deoted to the phase

state. The boo! is saturated *ith *idespreadmisconceptions about the phase phenomenon and

misguided theories trying to e&plain it. The techni4ue%related aspect

of the boo! is also presented ineffectiely.

+t is 4uite li!ely that the author himself has no practical

e&perience" *hich can also be said for the contents of his other

do?ens of boo!s deoted to arious topics.



Charle& $art

harles Tart *as born in the nited 6tates in1B:@. 8e receied his Ph. 9. in psychology in

1B>: at the niersity of orth arolina. Tart

also receied training at 6tanford niersity. 8e

*as one of the founders of transpersonal

psychology.

8e became one of the most preeminent

researchers of unusual states of a*areness afterthe publication of %ltered States of :onsciousness (1B>B)" the first

boo! that he *or!ed on. +t *as one of the first boo!s to e&amine

entering the phase through dream consciousness. The boo! receied

popularity *hen the use 269 and Mari'uana *ere often ie*ed as

ehicles to eleated consciousness" and the boo! een describes theuse of chemical substances in the conte&t of phase states.



Chapter 1) – 2inal $e&t

The 4uestions on the test may hae one or more correct ans*ers"

or none of the ans*ers may be correct. Thus" the 4uestions must be

read completely through" and attention must be paid to theirimplications and finer points.

3 students theoretical !no*ledge is considered to be satisfactory

if the correct ans*ers to at least one%half of the 4uestions are gien. +fa score of less than =CK is receied" a student should study the *ea!

points again or re%read the entire guideboo!. Other*ise" it is 4uite

probable that fundamental mista!es *ill be made" *hich *ill in turn

interfere *ith indiidual practice.

+f a score of at least ACK is achieed" then a theoretical

!no*ledge of the practice is at an adanced leel" *hich *ill surelyhae a positie effect on the practitioners direct e&periences in the

phase.

3ns*ers are in the appendi& at the end of the guideboo!.

1. +oi&e and reali&ti! image& unepe!tedly ari&e 8hen

performing the indire!t te!hni%ue of phantom 8iggling. What!an 3e done;

3) ontinue *ith phantom *iggling.

7) 6*itch to obsering images or listening in.

) Try to do all or some of the techni4ues simultaneously.

9) hoose the techni4ue *ith the strongest precursors and

continue *ith that one.



7) +ntending to perform indirect techni4ues upon

a*a!ening.

) Recalling dreams from the night before.

9) reating a plan of action for use in case of entrance to

the phase in such a *ay.

. If a8arene&& o!!ur& at the ?ery la&t moment of a dream that

fade& a8ayJ 8hi!h of the a!tion& gi?en 3elo8 &hould 3e

underta"en in order to enter the pha&e a& &oon a& po&&i3le;

3) Try to fall asleep again in order to once again become

self%a*are *hile dreaming.

7) +mmediately perform indirect techni4ues.) Ta!e a brea! and perform direct techni4ues later.

9) 6tart to recall that nights dreams.

/. Whi!h of the&e are mo&t li"ely to produ!e a %ui!" pha&e

entry 8hen a8a"ening in a &tate of &leep paraly&i&;

3) Rela&ation.

7) Falling asleep *ith the intention of becoming self%a*are

*hile in a dream.) Moing the physical eyes and tongue.

9) 9irect techni4ues.

0. What &hould 3e done 8hen &pontaneou&ly thro8n from the

3ody 8hile lying do8n or 8a"ing up in the middle of the night;

3) Return to the body and perform appropriate separation

techni4ues.7) +mplement a predetermined plan of action for the phase.

) 9eepen immediately.9) Try to 4uic!ly establish ision" if it is not already

present.

9) Employ the forced falling asleep techni4ue.

. While trying to enter the pha&eJ rolling out 8or"& at fir&tJ

3ut only partiallyJ and the mo?ement !annot 3e etended any



further no matter 8hat effort i& made. What i& it 3e&t to do in thi&

&ituation;

3) Try to turn bac! and roll out further once again" and

repeat seeral times.

7) 6tart doing cycles of indirect techni4ues.) Ta!e a brea! and try to separate after seeral minutes.

9) Try to separate by leitating" getting up" or climbing out.

E) se any indirect techni4ue for phase entry and attempt

rolling out again.

15. 6 pra!titioner unepe!tedly get& &tu!" in the floor or 8all

8hile rolling out. What &hould 3e done to re&ume the pha&e;3) Force through the obstacle.

7) Employ translocation techni4ues.

) 3ttempt to return to the body and roll out again.

9) 7ecome able to locate an e&it from the problem.

E) Perform sensory amplification.

11. 9o8 may a pra!titioner deepen the pha&e 8hile flying

through a dar" formle&& &pa!e 8hile &eparating;3) Employ the techni4ue of falling headfirst.

7) There is no *ay to do this.

) reate and amplify ibrations.9) 7egin self%palpation.

E) Translocate to another area in the phase and deepen it

through sensory amplification.

1#. If deepening te!hni%ue& do not !ompletely 8or" 8ithin 1*

to '5 &e!ond&J 8hat !an 3e done;

3) ontinue trying to go deeper.

7) E&it from the phase.

) 3ttempt to return to the body and once use phase

entrance techni4ues.

9) Proceed to performing predetermined actions.



1'. Whi!h te!hni%ue or 8ay of maintaining the pha&e &hould

3e u&ed 8hen teleporting &ome8here 8ith !lo&ed eye&;

3) The techni4ue of amplifying and maintaining ibrations.

7) Tactile sensory amplification" feeling the sensation of

rubbing the hands together.) o techni4ue.

9) The techni4ue of rotation.

E) Repeating aloud the desire to remain in the phase.

1). In 8hi!h &ituation& i& falling a&leep in the pha&e mo&t

li"ely;

3) 0hen loo!ing for a desired person.7) 0hen communicating *ith animate ob'ects.

) 0hen completely calm" haing completely halted all

actiity.

9) 0hen traelling aimlessly.

E) 0hen ta!ing part in side eents.

1*. Whi!h of the follo8ing indi!ator& guarantee& that the

pha&e ha& 3een eited for reality;3) 3 cloc! sho*s the right time" and the same time een if

a practitioner turns a*ay from it and then loo!s at it again.

7) 6ensations are completely realistic.) The presence of friends or family in the room *ho

communicate *ith the practitioner.

9) 3n inner feeling that the phase has ended.

E) othing happens after staring at the end of a finger fromclose distance for fie to 1C seconds.

1. In 8hi!h &ituation& &hould tra?elling in the pha&e 3e

deli3erately di&!ontinued;

3) 0hen a fear that a return *ill be impossible" or a direct

fear of death arises.

7) 0hen there is a real possibility that the practitioner *ill

be late for something in the physical *orld.



) 0hen frightened by some strange eents or ob'ects.

9) 0hen there is an ine&plicable mortal fear of something

un!no*n or incomprehensible.

E) +f someone in the phase strongly insists that the

practitioner should return to reality.F) +f sharp pain occurs in the body that is not caused by

interaction *ith ob'ects in the phase *orld.

1/. What 8ill mo&t li"ely o!!ur 8hen trying to e?ade &ome

a8ful 3eing or dangerou& per&on;

3) The ob'ect *ill get bored and stop.

7) Fear of the ob'ect *ill go a*ay.) The phase *ill occur more fre4uently" as *ell as be

longer and deeper than usual.

9) The practitioner *ill become calmer and unnered less

fre4uently.

E) The more fear there is" the more often the ob'ect *illchase the practitioner.

10. When &hould e&ta3li&hing ?i&ion in the pha&e 3e!on&ideredJ if it ha& not o!!urred on it& o8n;

3) +mmediately upon separation *ithout deepening.

7) +mmediately after deepening.) 0hile flying through dar! space during translocation.

9) 3fter fie to 1C seconds of being sure that a phase entry

has occurred.

E) 0hen there is a desire to immediately e&plore thesurroundings after separation has occurred.

1. 9o8 i& it po&&i3le to pa&& through a 8all 8hile &tanding

!lo&e to itJ 8ithout &topping to loo" at it from !lo&e range;

3) 7y gradually pushing the hands and arms through it" and

then the entire body and head.

7) 7y gradually pushing the head through it at first" and

then the entire body.



) 7y trying to put a hole in it" and then e&panding the hole

and climbing through it.

9) 7y ramming it *ith a shoulder" trying to bring it do*n.

#5. While in the pha&eJ a pra!titioner i& in a &ituation 8here

the arm& are totally paralyHed and immo3iliHed. $hi& happen& in

a room 8ith a &ingle eitD a door that ha& &tarted to !lo&e. What

are the t8o ea&ie&t 8ay& to "eep the door open;

3) Order the door to stay open in a loud" imperious" and

assertie manner.

7) Free the arms and hold bac! the door.

) 6top the door *ith tele!inesis.9) reate a person through the method of finding.

E) There is no *ay to do this.

#1. What diffi!ultie& may ari&e for a pra!titioner in the pha&e

8hile u&ing the door te!hni%ue of tran&lo!ation;

3) The door *ill not open.

7) The *rong place is behind the door.

) +t is not possible to use the hand to pull the door handle because the hand goes through the handle.

9) 9ifficulties *ith internal concentration occur at the

critical moment.E) 3 blac! oid often appears on the other side of the door.

##. What are ne!e&&ary !ondition& for getting re&ult& 8hen

tran&lo!ating in the pha&e after rolling out during initial&eparation from the 3ody;

3) 3bsence of ision.7) Practicing after sunset.

) 3 firm intention to end up some*here.

9) ertainty of the final result.

E) The presence of ibrations.



#'. 6 pra!titioner i& in a dar" room in the pha&e 8here

e?erything i& poorly ?i&i3le. $here i& a !handelierJ 3ut no light

&8it!h. 9o8 !an the &8it!h 3e a!ti?ated to light the room;

3) Translocate through teleportation to the place *here the

toggle or s*itch for the light in 4uestion is located.7) Find a flashlight through the method of finding and

illuminate the room *ith it.

) Rub the light bulbs in the chandelier *ith the hands.

9) reate a light s*itch in the room using the method of

finding an ob'ect.

E) lose the eyes and imagine that the room is already lit"

and then open the eyes.

#). When !ommuni!ating 8ith an animate o34e!t in the pha&eJ

a de&ire to add a &pe!ifi! per&on to the &!enery ari&e&. Whi!h of

the follo8ing a!tion& are ad?i&a3le only for 3eginner& in thi&

!a&e;

3) Propose going to a neighboring room *here the needed

sub'ect *ill be presented through the use of the door or corner

techni4ue.7) 6ummon the needed person by calling their name loudly.

) Translocate bac! to the same place" and hae both

animate ob'ects present there upon your return.9) 3dd the needed person through the closed eyes

techni4ue.

E) 3s! the animate ob'ect that you are tal!ing to if it does

not mind adding someone to the scenery.

#*. Where i& one not allo8ed to go u&ing tran&lo!ation

te!hni%ue&;

3) +nside a mammoth.

7) To the past or the future.

) To heaen.

9) To an episode of the moie Star 5ars.



#. 9o8 8ill a de!ea&ed per&on differ from a prototype in the

pha&e 8hen !orre!tly performing the te!hni%ue for finding the

per&on;

3) Only the practitioner himself can con'ure up differences"

or not see or perceie them.7) The deceased *ill hae a different timbre of oice.

) There *ill be a radiant halo around the deceaseds head.

9) Physical perception of the deceased *ill be less realistic

than in real life.

E) The deceased *ill not remember anything.

#/. What diffi!ultie& !an ari&e in the pha&e 8hile o3taininginformation from animate &our!e& of information;

3) +nability to remember information obtained.

7) 6ources of information are silent.

) +nade4uateness of the sources of information.

9) 6e&ual attraction" if the source of information is of theopposite or desired se&.

E) 7eing gien false information.

#0. 9o8 might a pra!titioner a!!elerate the healing pro!e&& of

a !old that i& !hara!teriHed 3y a &tuffy no&e and a &ore throat;

3) Maintaining and amplifying ibrations for the entirelength of the phase" and entering it oer seeral days in a ro*.

7) Ta!ing aspirin and entering the phase oer seeral days

in a ro*.

) Traelling to hot places in the phase and entering it oerseeral days in a ro*.

9) E&periencing stressful situations oer seeral phases.E) Finding a doctor in the phase and as!ing him *hat it is

best to do in real%life or een in the phase itself.

#. Whi!h of the follo8ing a!hie?ement& 3elong to Stephen

<aBerge;

3) Founding the 2ucidity +nstitute.



7) 3 Ph.9. in anthropology.

) 6cientifically proing that lucid dreaming is possible.

9) 3 Ph.9. in psychophysiology.

E) Proing that eye moements in the phase and in reality

are synchroni?ed.

'5. Who of approa!hed the &tudy of the pha&e &tate from a

pragmati! point-of-?ie8 that 8a& totally de?oid of o!!ulti&m;

3) 6tephen 2a7erge

7) Robert Monroe

) 6ylan Muldoon

9) harles 2eadbeater E) Patricia 5arfield

F) arlos astaneda



6ppendi

6SSESS,E+$ O2 P:6C$I$IO+E:S7

EPE:IE+CES AC96P$E: 1#

These assessments of the practitioners e&periences refer only to

the specific descriptions that they submitted and are not meant as anassessment of their practice as a *hole. 6ome of practitioners *ouldeasily be able to e&perience successful phases earning four to fie

points at other times. This especially concerns 7oris Pronya!in"

3le&ander 9yren!o" 7oris 7ender" and 3le&ei Teslen!o. This is

also possibly true of the other practitioners" *ith *hom the author is

not closely ac4uainted.

o. 1 7oris Pronya!in I C.= points

o. - 3le&ei 7a!hare I C.= points

o. : 9mitry Mar!o I C points

o. < +an a!ole I 1.= points

o. = atalya Do?henoa I 1 point

o. > 3le&ander Furmen!o I 1 point o.@ Roman Reuto I : points

o. A 3le&ander 9yren!o I 1.= points o. B 6yatosla 7arano I - points

o. 1C Oleg 6ushchen!o I -.= points

o. 11 3le&ander 2ele!o I 1.= points

o. 1- 7oris 7ender I - points o. 1: 3le&ei Teslen!o I : points



6+SWE:S $O $9E 2I+6< $ES$ AC96P$E: 1)

1. 3"7""9J

-. 9J

:. 7" " 9J<. J

=. 3"7""9J

>. 7J

@. I

A. J

B. 3" 9" EJ

1C. 7" J

11. 3""9"EJ

1-. 3"9"3Q9J

1:. J1<. 9" EJ

1=. EJ

1>. 7" FJ

1@. " EJ

1A. 7" 9J

1B. I

-C. 3" J

-1. 3" 7" 9J

--. 3" " 9J

-:. EJ-<. 7J

-=. IJ

->. 3J

-@. 7""9"EJ

-A. 7""EJ

-B. 3""9"EJ

:C. 3" EJ

6 SI,P<I2IE( (ESC:IP$IO+ O2 $9E E6SIES$

,E$9O( 2O: E+$E:I+ $9E P96SE

USI+ I+(I:EC$ $EC9+I=UES

pon a*a!ening" *ithout moing or opening the eyes"

immediately try to separate from oneGs body. The separation attempt

should be carried out *ithout any imagining" but rather *ith thedesire to ma!e a real moement *ithout straining the muscles

(rolling out" leitation" standing up" etc.).

+f separation does not occur *ithin three to fie seconds"immediately try alternating seeral of the most effectie techni4ues

for three to fie seconds each. 0hen one of the techni4ues *or!s"

continue it for a longer period of time/

% Obsering images/ Try to e&amine and discern the picturesarising before closed eyes.

% 2istening in/ 3ttempt to hear sounds in the head and ma!e theselouder by listening in or strengthening the *illJ

% Rotating/ +magine rotating around the head%to%foot a&isJ

% Phantom *iggling/ Try to moe a part of the body *ithout

straining the muscles" and try to increase the range of moementJ

% 6training the brain/ Try straining the brain" *hich *ill lead to

ibrations that may also be intensified by straining the brain.



3s soon as one techni4ue clearly starts to *or!" continue *ith it

as long as progress is apparent" and then try to separate. +f separation

fails" return to the techni4ue that *as *or!ing.

9o not gie up alternating through techni4ues until one minute has

elapsed" but do not continue for more than t*o minutes. 6eparationfrom the body may be attempted periodically" especially if interesting

sensations occur.

$6>E P6:$ I+ :ESE6:C9

Ta!e part in the research of a techni4ue. The techni4ue of

imagined sensations is described in hapter - in the section on6econdary Techni4ues. This techni4ue is also commonly !no*n as

the #cell phone techni4ue$. 0hile this guideboo! *as being *ritten"

e&periments *ith this techni4ue *ere conducted at the 6chool of Out%

of%7ody Traels seminars. Results *ere astounding. 9ue to the fact

that this techni4ue is easy to understand and apply in practice" itcould be the most straightfor*ard and effectie one for achieing the

phase state. 3lmost eery second attempt made *ith this techni4ue

has yielded results" proided it is employed as an indirect techni4ue.9ue to this techni4ues huge potential for populari?ing and

spreading !no*ledge of the phenomenon" anyone *ho is interested is

inited to ta!e part in a global e&periment of the techni4ueseffectieness. +n addition to testing it" a researcher may propose the

techni4ue to interested persons or post it on the +nternet to increase

the number of practitioners. Please submit the results of your

e&periments *ith the techni4ue to the e%mail address/ aing,aing.ru

8ere it is/

$9E CE<< P9O+E $EC9+I=UE

The practice of this phase entry techni4ue is to imagine the

sensation that something is resting in the hand" desirably upon

a*a!ening *ithout any physical moement. +t is best to imagine a



cell phone is in the hand because the modern person is 4uite

accustomed to this sensation" although any other ob'ect *ill do. +t is

necessary to actiely and attentiely focus on the sensations in the

palm of the hand. Most li!ely" the physical sensation of a phone lying

in the hand *ill 4uic!ly arise. The sensation *ill become increasingly palpable. +f a sensation does not arise *ithin 1C seconds" the

techni4ue not going to *or! and it is time to s*itch to another one.

0hen the sensation of a phone in the hand occurs" focus eery bit

of attention on it. +t should be noted that this *ill not be an imagined

sensation" but a real one. This should be understood from the ery

beginning" and results should be e&pected. Once the sensation is

stable" start feeling the mobile phone *ith the fingers. Physicalsensations should be e&perienced. The physical body" of course" must

not moe or strain. +f this does not *or!" only focus attention on the

sensation of the phone lying in the hand and try to feel the phone

*ith the fingers later. +f feeling the phone *ith the fingers is

successful" actiely roll the phone around the hand" feeling all of itsdetails.

3s soon as it is possible to roll the cell phone around in the hand"

separation from the body may be attempted. +n this case it is usuallyeasiest to separate by rolling out or standing up. ontinue to hold the

phone and roll it around" *hich *ill maintain the emerging phase

state. 6eparation in this case should be more li!e actually getting up physically or rolling out of bed" rather than actually separating one

thing from something else. That is" do this in the same *ay as

physically getting out of bed" starting from the sensation of the phone

in the hand.+f separation is unsuccessful" continue to attentiely feel the phone

in the hand for a little *hile longer and try to separate again. +fseparation happens" the ne&t step is to ta!e actions that are typical for

a phase e&perience/ deepening" and then accomplishing

predetermined tas!s *hile performing #maintaining$ techni4ues. +f

only a partial separation occurs" then separation by force should be

attempted.



5enerally" the real sensation of a phone in the hand arises *ith

eery second attempt. Furthermore" achieing success only re4uires

e&perience and some de&terity since feeling the sensation of a phone

in the hand signifies that the re4uired state has been reached and

subse4uent actions may be attempted.

6$$E+$IO+F

0hen ma!ing attempts to enter the phase" the practitioner should

hae complete confidence that he *ill be immediately successful in

eerything. Een a shroud of doubt *ill !eep the practitioner in his

body" this is especially true *hen it comes to indirect techni4ues.Four typical barriers to mastering the phase encountered by BCK of

practicioners/

1 % Forgetting to deepen the phase

- % Forgetting to maintain the phase

: % 3bsence of a plan of action *hen in the phase< % Forgetting to try to re%enter the phase after a foul

$9E SC9OO< O2 OU$-O2-BO(Y $:6@E<

Michael Radugas 6chool of Out%of%7ody Trael conductstraining seminars in many countries around the *orld. The

course*or! allo*s students to master the phase phenomenon and

hone their s!ills at traeling in the phase. +nformation on e&isting

branches and seminar schedules are aailable on the *ebsitewww.obe4u.com. 0e also *elcome potential partners interested in

organi?ing 6chool of Out%of%7ody Trael branches and seminars. 3llcorrespondence regarding seminars" partnerships" and proposals

related to the translation of this boo! may be handled by e%mail at

aing,aing.ru.

B:IE2 <OSS6:Y O2 $E:,S 6+( (E2I+I$IO+S





Out-of-Body eperien!e AOBEJ lu!id dreaming A<(J a&tral – a

number of terms united by the phase that refer to the state in *hich a

person" *hile being fully conscious" reali?es consciousness outside

the normal range of physical perception.

Indire!t te!hni%ue& I entry into the phase *ithin fie minutes of

a*a!ening from sleep of any duration % proided there has beenminimal physical moement.

(ire!t te!hni%ue& I entry into the phase *ithout any prior sleep"

after e&cessie physical moement upon a*a!ening" or haing been

a*a!e for at least fie minutes.(ream Con&!iou&ne&& I entry into the phase through becoming

consciously a*are *hile a dream episode is happening.(i&&o!iation I separationJ in this case" a scientific term describing

e&periences in the phase.Sleep paraly&i& I a stuporJ the complete immobili?ation that often

occurs *hen falling asleep" a*a!ening" and entering or e&iting the

phase.Sten!il I the real physical body that is no longer perceied *hile in

the phase.(eepening the pha&e I methods for ma!ing the phase as realistic

as possible by stabili?ing the surrounding space.,aintaining the pha&e I methods for maintaining the phase state

by preenting a lapse into sleep" a return to reality" or an imagined

return to reality.:E, I rapid eye moement sleep (REM phase)J a sleep phase that

is characteri?ed by increased brain actiity that is accompanied by

rapid eye moement and dreaming.2oul I an inadertent termination of the phase through a

spontaneous return to eeryday reality.Cy!le& of indire!t te!hni%ue& %% the easiest *ay to enter the phase"

employed by rapidly alternating certain techni4ues upon a*a!ening

from sleep until one of them *or!s.



SC9OO< O2 OU$-O2-BO(Y $:6@E< II

PE:SO+6< EPE:IE+CES

$hi& 3oo" i& the free&tanding &upplement to School of Out-of- Body Travel I – A Practical Guideboo It i& intended to gi?e a

fir&t-hand demon&tration of the out-of-3ody eperien!e in

pra!ti!eJ 8hile 3ringing attention to !orre!t a!tion& and mi&ta"e&

made 8hen out-of-3ody.

+ts one thing to !no* *hich techni4ues can be used to control and

leae the perception of the body" but another thing to actually !no*

ho* to use those techni4ues. +ts one thing to read descriptions of asingle indiiduals e&periences" but another to learn about ho* alarge number of other practitioners regard the techni4ues and feel

about them. ot eeryone is able to figure out *hat e&actly to do and

ho* to do it *ithout reading this boo!. Techni4ue%related theory and

real e&perience are essentially t*o different things.

The po*er inherent in this collection of personal practitioner

e&periences is such that een if you neer intend to try out thetechni4ues described in it" you are practically guaranteed to

neertheless encounter this phenomenon" as it *ill enter your

subconscious mind as a !ind of programming that *ill sooner or later

actiate at the right moment. This collection is all the more beneficial

for those *ho *ould li!e to receie real guidance in their

e&plorations. 3ll of the fundamental mista!es that practitioners are prone to ma!e are described and analy?ed here. 8aing read the

boo!" the practitioner *ill be armed *ith !no*ledge of the mostdistilled and erified !ind.

+n preparation for this boo!" the personal e&periences of hundreds of

practitioners *ere collected at seminars" through the *ebsite" and by

mail. 8o*eer" only the most demonstratie descriptions *erechosen for inclusion. Thus" the selected descriptions are inaluable

not only for those *ho hae 'ust started out on their 'ourney *ith the

most e&traordinary practice of out%of%body trael" but also for those

*ho already hae substantial e&perience *ith it.



+ *ould li!e to e&press my gratitude to all those *ho assisted me in

putting together this one%of%a%!ind compilation. ou hae made a

contribution to this field of study and it only remains for me to *ish

you further success" *hich *ill sho* that my commentary on your

e&periences *as right on.

Michael Raduga Founder of the School of Out-of-Body Travel

March 2, 2!

Table of ontents/

Part 1

2eaing the Perception of the 7ody

Part II

Out%of%7ody E&periments

Part III

The E&periences of 0ell%Dno*n 3uthors

Part I@

9emonstratie ase 6tudies

6ppendi



www.obe4u.com

Proposals regarding translating and publishing this boo! and other

*or!s of M.Raduga may be sent to [email protected]


mailto:[email protected]




yoga of the inner world

Documents